HG(1) Mercurial Manual HG(1)
NAME
hg - Mercurial source code management system
SYNOPSIS
hg command [option]... [argument]...
DESCRIPTION
The hg command provides a command line interface to the Mercurial sys-
tem.
COMMAND ELEMENTS
files...
indicates one or more filename or relative path filenames; see
File Name Patterns for information on pattern matching
path indicates a path on the local machine
revision
indicates a changeset which can be specified as a changeset re-
vision number, a tag, or a unique substring of the changeset
hash value
repository path
either the pathname of a local repository or the URI of a remote
repository.
OPTIONS
-R,--repository <REPO>
repository root directory or name of overlay bundle file
--cwd <DIR>
change working directory
-y, --noninteractive
do not prompt, automatically pick the first choice for all
prompts
-q, --quiet
suppress output
-v, --verbose
enable additional output
--color <TYPE>
when to colorize (boolean, always, auto, never, or debug)
--config <CONFIG[+]>
set/override config option (use 'section.name=value')
--debug
enable debugging output
--debugger
start debugger
--encoding <ENCODE>
set the charset encoding (default: UTF-8)
--encodingmode <MODE>
set the charset encoding mode (default: strict)
--traceback
always print a traceback on exception
--time time how long the command takes
--profile
print command execution profile
--version
output version information and exit
-h, --help
display help and exit
--hidden
consider hidden changesets
--pager <TYPE>
when to paginate (boolean, always, auto, or never) (default:
auto)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
COMMANDS
Repository creation
clone
make a copy of an existing repository:
hg clone [OPTION]... SOURCE [DEST]
Create a copy of an existing repository in a new directory.
If no destination directory name is specified, it defaults to the base-
name of the source.
The location of the source is added to the new repository's .hg/hgrc
file, as the default to be used for future pulls.
Only local paths and ssh:// URLs are supported as destinations. For
ssh:// destinations, no working directory or .hg/hgrc will be created
on the remote side.
If the source repository has a bookmark called '@' set, that revision
will be checked out in the new repository by default.
To check out a particular version, use -u/--update, or -U/--noupdate to
create a clone with no working directory.
To pull only a subset of changesets, specify one or more revisions
identifiers with -r/--rev or branches with -b/--branch. The resulting
clone will contain only the specified changesets and their ancestors.
These options (or 'clone src#rev dest') imply --pull, even for local
source repositories.
In normal clone mode, the remote normalizes repository data into a com-
mon exchange format and the receiving end translates this data into its
local storage format. --stream activates a different clone mode that
essentially copies repository files from the remote with minimal data
processing. This significantly reduces the CPU cost of a clone both re-
motely and locally. However, it often increases the transferred data
size by 30-40%. This can result in substantially faster clones where
I/O throughput is plentiful, especially for larger repositories. A
side-effect of --stream clones is that storage settings and require-
ments on the remote are applied locally: a modern client may inherit
legacy or inefficient storage used by the remote or a legacy Mercurial
client may not be able to clone from a modern Mercurial remote.
Note Specifying a tag will include the tagged changeset but not the
changeset containing the tag.
For efficiency, hardlinks are used for cloning whenever the source and
destination are on the same filesystem (note this applies only to the
repository data, not to the working directory). Some filesystems, such
as AFS, implement hardlinking incorrectly, but do not report errors. In
these cases, use the --pull option to avoid hardlinking.
Mercurial will update the working directory to the first applicable re-
vision from this list:
a. null if -U or the source repository has no changesets
b. if -u . and the source repository is local, the first parent of the
source repository's working directory
c. the changeset specified with -u (if a branch name, this means the
latest head of that branch)
d. the changeset specified with -r
e. the tipmost head specified with -b
f. the tipmost head specified with the url#branch source syntax
g. the revision marked with the '@' bookmark, if present
h. the tipmost head of the default branch
i. tip
When cloning from servers that support it, Mercurial may fetch pre-gen-
erated data from a server-advertised URL or inline from the same
stream. When this is done, hooks operating on incoming changesets and
changegroups may fire more than once, once for each pre-generated bun-
dle and as well as for any additional remaining data. In addition, if
an error occurs, the repository may be rolled back to a partial clone.
This behavior may change in future releases. See hg help -e cloneb-
undles for more.
Examples:
• clone a remote repository to a new directory named hg/:
hg clone https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/
• create a lightweight local clone:
hg clone project/ project-feature/
• clone from an absolute path on an ssh server (note double-slash):
hg clone ssh://user@server//home/projects/alpha/
• do a streaming clone while checking out a specified version:
hg clone --stream http://server/repo -u 1.5
• create a repository without changesets after a particular revision:
hg clone -r 04e544 experimental/ good/
• clone (and track) a particular named branch:
hg clone https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/#stable
See hg help urls for details on specifying URLs.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-U, --noupdate
the clone will include an empty working directory (only a repos-
itory)
-u,--updaterev <REV>
revision, tag, or branch to check out
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
do not clone everything, but include this changeset and its an-
cestors
-b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
do not clone everything, but include this branch's changesets
and their ancestors
--pull use pull protocol to copy metadata
--uncompressed
an alias to --stream (DEPRECATED)
--stream
clone with minimal data processing
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
init
create a new repository in the given directory:
hg init [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [DEST]
Initialize a new repository in the given directory. If the given direc-
tory does not exist, it will be created.
If no directory is given, the current directory is used.
It is possible to specify an ssh:// URL as the destination. See hg
help urls for more information.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)
Remote repository management
incoming
show new changesets found in source:
hg incoming [-p] [-n] [-M] [-f] [-r REV]... [--bundle FILENAME] [SOURCE]
Show new changesets found in the specified path/URL or the default pull
location. These are the changesets that would have been pulled by hg
pull at the time you issued this command.
See pull for valid source format details.
With -B/--bookmarks, the result of bookmark comparison between local
and remote repositories is displayed. With -v/--verbose, status is also
displayed for each bookmark like below:
BM1 01234567890a added
BM2 1234567890ab advanced
BM3 234567890abc diverged
BM4 34567890abcd changed
The action taken locally when pulling depends on the status of each
bookmark:
added
pull will create it
advanced
pull will update it
diverged
pull will create a divergent bookmark
changed
result depends on remote changesets
From the point of view of pulling behavior, bookmark existing only in
the remote repository are treated as added, even if it is in fact lo-
cally deleted.
For remote repository, using --bundle avoids downloading the changesets
twice if the incoming is followed by a pull.
Examples:
• show incoming changes with patches and full description:
hg incoming -vp
• show incoming changes excluding merges, store a bundle:
hg in -vpM --bundle incoming.hg
hg pull incoming.hg
• briefly list changes inside a bundle:
hg in changes.hg -T "{desc|firstline}\n"
Returns 0 if there are incoming changes, 1 otherwise.
Options:
-f, --force
run even if remote repository is unrelated
-n, --newest-first
show newest record first
--bundle <FILE>
file to store the bundles into
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
a remote changeset intended to be added
-B, --bookmarks
compare bookmarks
-b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
a specific branch you would like to pull
-p, --patch
show patch
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
-l,--limit <NUM>
limit number of changes displayed
-M, --no-merges
do not show merges
--stat output diffstat-style summary of changes
-G, --graph
show the revision DAG
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: in
outgoing
show changesets not found in the destination:
hg outgoing [-M] [-p] [-n] [-f] [-r REV]... [DEST]...
Show changesets not found in the specified destination repository or
the default push location. These are the changesets that would be
pushed if a push was requested.
See pull for details of valid destination formats.
With -B/--bookmarks, the result of bookmark comparison between local
and remote repositories is displayed. With -v/--verbose, status is also
displayed for each bookmark like below:
BM1 01234567890a added
BM2 deleted
BM3 234567890abc advanced
BM4 34567890abcd diverged
BM5 4567890abcde changed
The action taken when pushing depends on the status of each bookmark:
added
push with -B will create it
deleted
push with -B will delete it
advanced
push will update it
diverged
push with -B will update it
changed
push with -B will update it
From the point of view of pushing behavior, bookmarks existing only in
the remote repository are treated as deleted, even if it is in fact
added remotely.
Returns 0 if there are outgoing changes, 1 otherwise.
Options:
-f, --force
run even when the destination is unrelated
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
a changeset intended to be included in the destination
-n, --newest-first
show newest record first
-B, --bookmarks
compare bookmarks
-b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
a specific branch you would like to push
-p, --patch
show patch
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
-l,--limit <NUM>
limit number of changes displayed
-M, --no-merges
do not show merges
--stat output diffstat-style summary of changes
-G, --graph
show the revision DAG
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: out
paths
show aliases for remote repositories:
hg paths [NAME]
Show definition of symbolic path name NAME. If no name is given, show
definition of all available names.
Option -q/--quiet suppresses all output when searching for NAME and
shows only the path names when listing all definitions.
Path names are defined in the [paths] section of your configuration
file and in /etc/mercurial/hgrc. If run inside a repository, .hg/hgrc
is used, too.
The path names default and default-push have a special meaning. When
performing a push or pull operation, they are used as fallbacks if no
location is specified on the command-line. When default-push is set,
it will be used for push and default will be used for pull; otherwise
default is used as the fallback for both. When cloning a repository,
the clone source is written as default in .hg/hgrc.
Note default and default-push apply to all inbound (e.g. hg incoming
) and outbound (e.g. hg outgoing, hg email and hg bundle) opera-
tions.
See hg help urls for more information.
Template:
The following keywords are supported. See also hg help templates.
name String. Symbolic name of the path alias.
pushurl
String. URL for push operations.
url String. URL or directory path for the other operations.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
pull
pull changes from the specified source:
hg pull [-u] [-f] [-r REV]... [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [SOURCE]...
Pull changes from a remote repository to a local one.
This finds all changes from the repository at the specified path or URL
and adds them to a local repository (the current one unless -R is spec-
ified). By default, this does not update the copy of the project in the
working directory.
When cloning from servers that support it, Mercurial may fetch pre-gen-
erated data. When this is done, hooks operating on incoming changesets
and changegroups may fire more than once, once for each pre-generated
bundle and as well as for any additional remaining data. See hg help -e
clonebundles for more.
Use hg incoming if you want to see what would have been added by a pull
at the time you issued this command. If you then decide to add those
changes to the repository, you should use hg pull -r X where X is the
last changeset listed by hg incoming.
If SOURCE is omitted, the 'default' path will be used. See hg help
urls for more information.
If multiple sources are specified, they will be pulled sequentially as
if the command was run multiple time. If --update is specify and the
command will stop at the first failed --update.
Specifying bookmark as . is equivalent to specifying the active book-
mark's name.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if an update had unresolved files.
Options:
-u, --update
update to new branch head if new descendants were pulled
-f, --force
run even when remote repository is unrelated
--confirm
confirm pull before applying changes
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
a remote changeset intended to be added
-B,--bookmark <BOOKMARK[+]>
bookmark to pull
-b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
a specific branch you would like to pull
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
push
push changes to the specified destination:
hg push [-f] [-r REV]... [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [DEST]...
Push changesets from the local repository to the specified destination.
This operation is symmetrical to pull: it is identical to a pull in the
destination repository from the current one.
By default, push will not allow creation of new heads at the destina-
tion, since multiple heads would make it unclear which head to use. In
this situation, it is recommended to pull and merge before pushing.
Use --new-branch if you want to allow push to create a new named branch
that is not present at the destination. This allows you to only create
a new branch without forcing other changes.
Note Extra care should be taken with the -f/--force option, which
will push all new heads on all branches, an action which will
almost always cause confusion for collaborators.
If -r/--rev is used, the specified revision and all its ancestors will
be pushed to the remote repository.
If -B/--bookmark is used, the specified bookmarked revision, its ances-
tors, and the bookmark will be pushed to the remote repository. Speci-
fying . is equivalent to specifying the active bookmark's name. Use the
--all-bookmarks option for pushing all current bookmarks.
Please see hg help urls for important details about ssh:// URLs. If
DESTINATION is omitted, a default path will be used.
When passed multiple destinations, push will process them one after the
other, but stop should an error occur.
The --pushvars option sends strings to the server that become environ-
ment variables prepended with HG_USERVAR_. For example, --pushvars EN-
ABLE_FEATURE=true, provides the server side hooks with HG_USERVAR_EN-
ABLE_FEATURE=true as part of their environment.
pushvars can provide for user-overridable hooks as well as set debug
levels. One example is having a hook that blocks commits containing
conflict markers, but enables the user to override the hook if the file
is using conflict markers for testing purposes or the file format has
strings that look like conflict markers.
By default, servers will ignore --pushvars. To enable it add the fol-
lowing to your configuration file:
[push]
pushvars.server = true
Returns 0 if push was successful, 1 if nothing to push.
Options:
-f, --force
force push
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
a changeset intended to be included in the destination
-B,--bookmark <BOOKMARK[+]>
bookmark to push
--all-bookmarks
push all bookmarks (EXPERIMENTAL)
-b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
a specific branch you would like to push
--new-branch
allow pushing a new branch
--pushvars <VALUE[+]>
variables that can be sent to server (ADVANCED)
--publish
push the changeset as public (EXPERIMENTAL)
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
serve
start stand-alone webserver:
hg serve [OPTION]...
Start a local HTTP repository browser and pull server. You can use this
for ad-hoc sharing and browsing of repositories. It is recommended to
use a real web server to serve a repository for longer periods of time.
Please note that the server does not implement access control. This
means that, by default, anybody can read from the server and nobody can
write to it by default. Set the web.allow-push option to * to allow ev-
erybody to push to the server. You should use a real web server if you
need to authenticate users.
By default, the server logs accesses to stdout and errors to stderr.
Use the -A/--accesslog and -E/--errorlog options to log to files.
To have the server choose a free port number to listen on, specify a
port number of 0; in this case, the server will print the port number
it uses.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-A,--accesslog <FILE>
name of access log file to write to
-d, --daemon
run server in background
--daemon-postexec <VALUE[+]>
used internally by daemon mode
-E,--errorlog <FILE>
name of error log file to write to
-p,--port <PORT>
port to listen on (default: 8000)
-a,--address <ADDR>
address to listen on (default: all interfaces)
--prefix <PREFIX>
prefix path to serve from (default: server root)
-n,--name <NAME>
name to show in web pages (default: working directory)
--web-conf <FILE>
name of the hgweb config file (see 'hg help hgweb')
--webdir-conf <FILE>
name of the hgweb config file (DEPRECATED)
--pid-file <FILE>
name of file to write process ID to
--stdio
for remote clients (ADVANCED)
--cmdserver <MODE>
for remote clients (ADVANCED)
-t,--templates <TEMPLATE>
web templates to use
--style <STYLE>
template style to use
-6, --ipv6
use IPv6 in addition to IPv4
--certificate <FILE>
SSL certificate file
--print-url
start and print only the URL
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
Change creation
commit
commit the specified files or all outstanding changes:
hg commit [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Commit changes to the given files into the repository. Unlike a cen-
tralized SCM, this operation is a local operation. See hg push for a
way to actively distribute your changes.
If a list of files is omitted, all changes reported by hg status will
be committed.
If you are committing the result of a merge, do not provide any file-
names or -I/-X filters.
If no commit message is specified, Mercurial starts your configured ed-
itor where you can enter a message. In case your commit fails, you will
find a backup of your message in .hg/last-message.txt.
The --close-branch flag can be used to mark the current branch head
closed. When all heads of a branch are closed, the branch will be con-
sidered closed and no longer listed.
The --amend flag can be used to amend the parent of the working direc-
tory with a new commit that contains the changes in the parent in addi-
tion to those currently reported by hg status, if there are any. The
old commit is stored in a backup bundle in .hg/strip-backup (see hg
help bundle and hg help unbundle on how to restore it).
Message, user and date are taken from the amended commit unless speci-
fied. When a message isn't specified on the command line, the editor
will open with the message of the amended commit.
It is not possible to amend public changesets (see hg help phases) or
changesets that have children.
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if nothing changed.
Examples:
• commit all files ending in .py:
hg commit --include "set:**.py"
• commit all non-binary files:
hg commit --exclude "set:binary()"
• amend the current commit and set the date to now:
hg commit --amend --date now
Options:
-A, --addremove
mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing
--close-branch
mark a branch head as closed
--amend
amend the parent of the working directory
-s, --secret
use the secret phase for committing
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
--force-close-branch
forcibly close branch from a non-head changeset (ADVANCED)
-i, --interactive
use interactive mode
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: ci
Change manipulation
abort
abort an unfinished operation (EXPERIMENTAL):
hg abort
Aborts a multistep operation like graft, histedit, rebase, merge, and
unshelve if they are in an unfinished state.
use --dry-run/-n to dry run the command.
Options:
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
backout
reverse effect of earlier changeset:
hg backout [OPTION]... [-r] REV
Prepare a new changeset with the effect of REV undone in the current
working directory. If no conflicts were encountered, it will be commit-
ted immediately.
If REV is the parent of the working directory, then this new changeset
is committed automatically (unless --no-commit is specified).
Note hg backout cannot be used to fix either an unwanted or incorrect
merge.
Examples:
• Reverse the effect of the parent of the working directory. This
backout will be committed immediately:
hg backout -r .
• Reverse the effect of previous bad revision 23:
hg backout -r 23
• Reverse the effect of previous bad revision 23 and leave changes un-
committed:
hg backout -r 23 --no-commit
hg commit -m "Backout revision 23"
By default, the pending changeset will have one parent, maintaining a
linear history. With --merge, the pending changeset will instead have
two parents: the old parent of the working directory and a new child of
REV that simply undoes REV.
Before version 1.7, the behavior without --merge was equivalent to
specifying --merge followed by hg update --clean . to cancel the merge
and leave the child of REV as a head to be merged separately.
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
See hg help revert for a way to restore files to the state of another
revision.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if nothing to backout or there are unresolved
files.
Options:
--merge
merge with old dirstate parent after backout
--commit
commit if no conflicts were encountered (DEPRECATED)
--no-commit
do not commit
--parent <REV>
parent to choose when backing out merge (DEPRECATED)
-r,--rev <REV>
revision to backout
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-t,--tool <TOOL>
specify merge tool
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
continue
resumes an interrupted operation (EXPERIMENTAL):
hg continue
Finishes a multistep operation like graft, histedit, rebase, merge, and
unshelve if they are in an interrupted state.
use --dry-run/-n to dry run the command.
Options:
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
graft
copy changes from other branches onto the current branch:
hg graft [OPTION]... [-r REV]... REV...
This command uses Mercurial's merge logic to copy individual changes
from other branches without merging branches in the history graph. This
is sometimes known as 'backporting' or 'cherry-picking'. By default,
graft will copy user, date, and description from the source changesets.
Changesets that are ancestors of the current revision, that have al-
ready been grafted, or that are merges will be skipped.
If --log is specified, log messages will have a comment appended of the
form:
(grafted from CHANGESETHASH)
If --force is specified, revisions will be grafted even if they are al-
ready ancestors of, or have been grafted to, the destination. This is
useful when the revisions have since been backed out.
If a graft merge results in conflicts, the graft process is interrupted
so that the current merge can be manually resolved. Once all conflicts
are addressed, the graft process can be continued with the -c/--con-
tinue option.
The -c/--continue option reapplies all the earlier options.
The --base option exposes more of how graft internally uses merge with
a custom base revision. --base can be used to specify another ancestor
than the first and only parent.
The command:
hg graft -r 345 --base 234
is thus pretty much the same as:
hg diff --from 234 --to 345 | hg import
but using merge to resolve conflicts and track moved files.
The result of a merge can thus be backported as a single commit by
specifying one of the merge parents as base, and thus effectively
grafting the changes from the other side.
It is also possible to collapse multiple changesets and clean up his-
tory by specifying another ancestor as base, much like rebase --col-
lapse --keep.
The commit message can be tweaked after the fact using commit --amend .
For using non-ancestors as the base to backout changes, see the backout
command and the hidden --parent option.
Examples:
• copy a single change to the stable branch and edit its description:
hg update stable
hg graft --edit 9393
• graft a range of changesets with one exception, updating dates:
hg graft -D "2085::2093 and not 2091"
• continue a graft after resolving conflicts:
hg graft -c
• show the source of a grafted changeset:
hg log --debug -r .
• show revisions sorted by date:
hg log -r "sort(all(), date)"
• backport the result of a merge as a single commit:
hg graft -r 123 --base 123^
• land a feature branch as one changeset:
hg up -cr default
hg graft -r featureX --base "ancestor('featureX', 'default')"
See hg help revisions for more about specifying revisions.
Returns 0 on successful completion, 1 if there are unresolved files.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
revisions to graft
--base <REV>
base revision when doing the graft merge (ADVANCED)
-c, --continue
resume interrupted graft
--stop stop interrupted graft
--abort
abort interrupted graft
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
--log append graft info to log message
--no-commit
don't commit, just apply the changes in working directory
-f, --force
force graft
-D, --currentdate
record the current date as commit date
-U, --currentuser
record the current user as committer
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
-t,--tool <TOOL>
specify merge tool
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
merge
merge another revision into working directory:
hg merge [-P] [[-r] REV]
The current working directory is updated with all changes made in the
requested revision since the last common predecessor revision.
Files that changed between either parent are marked as changed for the
next commit and a commit must be performed before any further updates
to the repository are allowed. The next commit will have two parents.
--tool can be used to specify the merge tool used for file merges. It
overrides the HGMERGE environment variable and your configuration
files. See hg help merge-tools for options.
If no revision is specified, the working directory's parent is a head
revision, and the current branch contains exactly one other head, the
other head is merged with by default. Otherwise, an explicit revision
with which to merge must be provided.
See hg help resolve for information on handling file conflicts.
To undo an uncommitted merge, use hg merge --abort which will check out
a clean copy of the original merge parent, losing all changes.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if there are unresolved files.
Options:
-f, --force
force a merge including outstanding changes (DEPRECATED)
-r,--rev <REV>
revision to merge
-P, --preview
review revisions to merge (no merge is performed)
--abort
abort the ongoing merge
-t,--tool <TOOL>
specify merge tool
Change organization
bookmarks
create a new bookmark or list existing bookmarks:
hg bookmarks [OPTIONS]... [NAME]...
Bookmarks are labels on changesets to help track lines of development.
Bookmarks are unversioned and can be moved, renamed and deleted.
Deleting or moving a bookmark has no effect on the associated change-
sets.
Creating or updating to a bookmark causes it to be marked as 'active'.
The active bookmark is indicated with a '*'. When a commit is made,
the active bookmark will advance to the new commit. A plain hg update
will also advance an active bookmark, if possible. Updating away from
a bookmark will cause it to be deactivated.
Bookmarks can be pushed and pulled between repositories (see hg help
push and hg help pull). If a shared bookmark has diverged, a new 'di-
vergent bookmark' of the form 'name@path' will be created. Using hg
merge will resolve the divergence.
Specifying bookmark as '.' to -m/-d/-l options is equivalent to speci-
fying the active bookmark's name.
A bookmark named '@' has the special property that hg clone will check
it out by default if it exists.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template
keywords and functions such as {bookmark}. See also hg help templates.
active Boolean. True if the bookmark is active.
Examples:
• create an active bookmark for a new line of development:
hg book new-feature
• create an inactive bookmark as a place marker:
hg book -i reviewed
• create an inactive bookmark on another changeset:
hg book -r .^ tested
• rename bookmark turkey to dinner:
hg book -m turkey dinner
• move the '@' bookmark from another branch:
hg book -f @
• print only the active bookmark name:
hg book -ql .
Options:
-f, --force
force
-r,--rev <REV>
revision for bookmark action
-d, --delete
delete a given bookmark
-m,--rename <OLD>
rename a given bookmark
-i, --inactive
mark a bookmark inactive
-l, --list
list existing bookmarks
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
aliases: bookmark
branch
set or show the current branch name:
hg branch [-fC] [NAME]
Note Branch names are permanent and global. Use hg bookmark to create
a light-weight bookmark instead. See hg help glossary for more
information about named branches and bookmarks.
With no argument, show the current branch name. With one argument, set
the working directory branch name (the branch will not exist in the
repository until the next commit). Standard practice recommends that
primary development take place on the 'default' branch.
Unless -f/--force is specified, branch will not let you set a branch
name that already exists.
Use -C/--clean to reset the working directory branch to that of the
parent of the working directory, negating a previous branch change.
Use the command hg update to switch to an existing branch. Use hg com-
mit --close-branch to mark this branch head as closed. When all heads
of a branch are closed, the branch will be considered closed.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-f, --force
set branch name even if it shadows an existing branch
-C, --clean
reset branch name to parent branch name
-r,--rev <VALUE[+]>
change branches of the given revs (EXPERIMENTAL)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
branches
list repository named branches:
hg branches [-c]
List the repository's named branches, indicating which ones are inac-
tive. If -c/--closed is specified, also list branches which have been
marked closed (see hg commit --close-branch).
Use the command hg update to switch to an existing branch.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template
keywords and functions such as {branch}. See also hg help templates.
active Boolean. True if the branch is active.
closed Boolean. True if the branch is closed.
current
Boolean. True if it is the current branch.
Returns 0.
Options:
-a, --active
show only branches that have unmerged heads (DEPRECATED)
-c, --closed
show normal and closed branches
-r,--rev <VALUE[+]>
show branch name(s) of the given rev
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
phase
set or show the current phase name:
hg phase [-p|-d|-s] [-f] [-r] [REV...]
With no argument, show the phase name of the current revision(s).
With one of -p/--public, -d/--draft or -s/--secret, change the phase
value of the specified revisions.
Unless -f/--force is specified, hg phase won't move changesets from a
lower phase to a higher phase. Phases are ordered as follows:
public < draft < secret
Returns 0 on success, 1 if some phases could not be changed.
(For more information about the phases concept, see hg help phases.)
Options:
-p, --public
set changeset phase to public
-d, --draft
set changeset phase to draft
-s, --secret
set changeset phase to secret
-f, --force
allow to move boundary backward
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
target revision
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
tag
add one or more tags for the current or given revision:
hg tag [-f] [-l] [-m TEXT] [-d DATE] [-u USER] [-r REV] NAME...
Name a particular revision using <name>.
Tags are used to name particular revisions of the repository and are
very useful to compare different revisions, to go back to significant
earlier versions or to mark branch points as releases, etc. Changing an
existing tag is normally disallowed; use -f/--force to override.
If no revision is given, the parent of the working directory is used.
To facilitate version control, distribution, and merging of tags, they
are stored as a file named ".hgtags" which is managed similarly to
other project files and can be hand-edited if necessary. This also
means that tagging creates a new commit. The file ".hg/localtags" is
used for local tags (not shared among repositories).
Tag commits are usually made at the head of a branch. If the parent of
the working directory is not a branch head, hg tag aborts; use
-f/--force to force the tag commit to be based on a non-head changeset.
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
Since tag names have priority over branch names during revision lookup,
using an existing branch name as a tag name is discouraged.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-f, --force
force tag
-l, --local
make the tag local
-r,--rev <REV>
revision to tag
--remove
remove a tag
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
tags
list repository tags:
hg tags
This lists both regular and local tags. When the -v/--verbose switch is
used, a third column "local" is printed for local tags. When the
-q/--quiet switch is used, only the tag name is printed.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template
keywords and functions such as {tag}. See also hg help templates.
type String. local for local tags.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
File content management
annotate
show changeset information by line for each file:
hg annotate [-r REV] [-f] [-a] [-u] [-d] [-n] [-c] [-l] FILE...
List changes in files, showing the revision id responsible for each
line.
This command is useful for discovering when a change was made and by
whom.
If you include --file, --user, or --date, the revision number is sup-
pressed unless you also include --number.
Without the -a/--text option, annotate will avoid processing files it
detects as binary. With -a, annotate will annotate the file anyway, al-
though the results will probably be neither useful nor desirable.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template
keywords and functions. See also hg help templates.
lines List of lines with annotation data.
path String. Repository-absolute path of the specified file.
And each entry of {lines} provides the following sub-keywords in addi-
tion to {date}, {node}, {rev}, {user}, etc.
line String. Line content.
lineno Integer. Line number at that revision.
path String. Repository-absolute path of the file at that revision.
See hg help templates.operators for the list expansion syntax.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
annotate the specified revision
--follow
follow copies/renames and list the filename (DEPRECATED)
--no-follow
don't follow copies and renames
-a, --text
treat all files as text
-u, --user
list the author (long with -v)
-f, --file
list the filename
-d, --date
list the date (short with -q)
-n, --number
list the revision number (default)
-c, --changeset
list the changeset
-l, --line-number
show line number at the first appearance
--skip <REV[+]>
revset to not display (EXPERIMENTAL)
-w, --ignore-all-space
ignore white space when comparing lines
-b, --ignore-space-change
ignore changes in the amount of white space
-B, --ignore-blank-lines
ignore changes whose lines are all blank
-Z, --ignore-space-at-eol
ignore changes in whitespace at EOL
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: blame
cat
output the current or given revision of files:
hg cat [OPTION]... FILE...
Print the specified files as they were at the given revision. If no re-
vision is given, the parent of the working directory is used.
Output may be to a file, in which case the name of the file is given
using a template string. See hg help templates. In addition to the com-
mon template keywords, the following formatting rules are supported:
%%
literal "%" character
%s
basename of file being printed
%d
dirname of file being printed, or '.' if in repository root
%p
root-relative path name of file being printed
%H
changeset hash (40 hexadecimal digits)
%R
changeset revision number
%h
short-form changeset hash (12 hexadecimal digits)
%r
zero-padded changeset revision number
%b
basename of the exporting repository
\
literal "" character
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template
keywords and functions. See also hg help templates.
data String. File content.
path String. Repository-absolute path of the file.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-o,--output <FORMAT>
print output to file with formatted name
-r,--rev <REV>
print the given revision
--decode
apply any matching decode filter
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
copy
mark files as copied for the next commit:
hg copy [OPTION]... (SOURCE... DEST | --forget DEST...)
Mark dest as having copies of source files. If dest is a directory,
copies are put in that directory. If dest is a file, the source must be
a single file.
By default, this command copies the contents of files as they exist in
the working directory. If invoked with -A/--after, the operation is
recorded, but no copying is performed.
To undo marking a destination file as copied, use --forget. With that
option, all given (positional) arguments are unmarked as copies. The
destination file(s) will be left in place (still tracked). Note that hg
copy --forget behaves the same way as hg rename --forget.
This command takes effect with the next commit by default.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if errors are encountered.
Options:
--forget
unmark a destination file as copied
-A, --after
record a copy that has already occurred
--at-rev <REV>
(un)mark copies in the given revision (EXPERIMENTAL)
-f, --force
forcibly copy over an existing managed file
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: cp
diff
diff repository (or selected files):
hg diff [OPTION]... ([-c REV] | [--from REV1] [--to REV2]) [FILE]...
Show differences between revisions for the specified files.
Differences between files are shown using the unified diff format.
Note hg diff may generate unexpected results for merges, as it will
default to comparing against the working directory's first par-
ent changeset if no revisions are specified. To diff against
the conflict regions, you can use --config diff.merge=yes.
By default, the working directory files are compared to its first par-
ent. To see the differences from another revision, use --from. To see
the difference to another revision, use --to. For example, hg diff
--from .^ will show the differences from the working copy's grandparent
to the working copy, hg diff --to . will show the diff from the working
copy to its parent (i.e. the reverse of the default), and hg diff
--from 1.0 --to 1.2 will show the diff between those two revisions.
Alternatively you can specify -c/--change with a revision to see the
changes in that changeset relative to its first parent (i.e. hg diff -c
42 is equivalent to hg diff --from 42^ --to 42)
Without the -a/--text option, diff will avoid generating diffs of files
it detects as binary. With -a, diff will generate a diff anyway, proba-
bly with undesirable results.
Use the -g/--git option to generate diffs in the git extended diff for-
mat. For more information, read hg help diffs.
Examples:
• compare a file in the current working directory to its parent:
hg diff foo.c
• compare two historical versions of a directory, with rename info:
hg diff --git --from 1.0 --to 1.2 lib/
• get change stats relative to the last change on some date:
hg diff --stat --from "date('may 2')"
• diff all newly-added files that contain a keyword:
hg diff "set:added() and grep(GNU)"
• compare a revision and its parents:
hg diff -c 9353 # compare against first parent
hg diff --from 9353^ --to 9353 # same using revset syntax
hg diff --from 9353^2 --to 9353 # compare against the second parent
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
revision (DEPRECATED)
--from <REV1>
revision to diff from
--to <REV2>
revision to diff to
-c,--change <REV>
change made by revision
-a, --text
treat all files as text
-g, --git
use git extended diff format (DEFAULT: diff.git)
--binary
generate binary diffs in git mode (default)
--nodates
omit dates from diff headers
--noprefix
omit a/ and b/ prefixes from filenames
-p, --show-function
show which function each change is in (DEFAULT: diff.showfunc)
--reverse
produce a diff that undoes the changes
-w, --ignore-all-space
ignore white space when comparing lines
-b, --ignore-space-change
ignore changes in the amount of white space
-B, --ignore-blank-lines
ignore changes whose lines are all blank
-Z, --ignore-space-at-eol
ignore changes in whitespace at EOL
-U,--unified <NUM>
number of lines of context to show
--stat output diffstat-style summary of changes
--root <DIR>
produce diffs relative to subdirectory
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
grep
search for a pattern in specified files:
hg grep [--diff] [OPTION]... PATTERN [FILE]...
Search the working directory or revision history for a regular expres-
sion in the specified files for the entire repository.
By default, grep searches the repository files in the working directory
and prints the files where it finds a match. To specify historical re-
visions instead of the working directory, use the --rev flag.
To search instead historical revision differences that contains a
change in match status ("-" for a match that becomes a non-match, or
"+" for a non-match that becomes a match), use the --diff flag.
PATTERN can be any Python (roughly Perl-compatible) regular expression.
If no FILEs are specified and the --rev flag isn't supplied, all files
in the working directory are searched. When using the --rev flag and
specifying FILEs, use the --follow argument to also follow the speci-
fied FILEs across renames and copies.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template
keywords and functions. See also hg help templates.
change String. Character denoting insertion + or removal -. Available
if --diff is specified.
lineno Integer. Line number of the match.
path String. Repository-absolute path of the file.
texts List of text chunks.
And each entry of {texts} provides the following sub-keywords.
matched
Boolean. True if the chunk matches the specified pattern.
text String. Chunk content.
See hg help templates.operators for the list expansion syntax.
Returns 0 if a match is found, 1 otherwise.
Options:
-0, --print0
end fields with NUL
--all an alias to --diff (DEPRECATED)
--diff search revision differences for when the pattern was added or
removed
-a, --text
treat all files as text
-f, --follow
follow changeset history, or file history across copies and re-
names
-i, --ignore-case
ignore case when matching
-l, --files-with-matches
print only filenames and revisions that match
-n, --line-number
print matching line numbers
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
search files changed within revision range
--all-files
include all files in the changeset while grepping (DEPRECATED)
-u, --user
list the author (long with -v)
-d, --date
list the date (short with -q)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
Change navigation
bisect
subdivision search of changesets:
hg bisect [-gbsr] [-U] [-c CMD] [REV]
This command helps to find changesets which introduce problems. To use,
mark the earliest changeset you know exhibits the problem as bad, then
mark the latest changeset which is free from the problem as good. Bi-
sect will update your working directory to a revision for testing (un-
less the -U/--noupdate option is specified). Once you have performed
tests, mark the working directory as good or bad, and bisect will ei-
ther update to another candidate changeset or announce that it has
found the bad revision.
As a shortcut, you can also use the revision argument to mark a revi-
sion as good or bad without checking it out first.
If you supply a command, it will be used for automatic bisection. The
environment variable HG_NODE will contain the ID of the changeset being
tested. The exit status of the command will be used to mark revisions
as good or bad: status 0 means good, 125 means to skip the revision,
127 (command not found) will abort the bisection, and any other
non-zero exit status means the revision is bad.
Some examples:
• start a bisection with known bad revision 34, and good revision 12:
hg bisect --bad 34
hg bisect --good 12
• advance the current bisection by marking current revision as good or
bad:
hg bisect --good
hg bisect --bad
• mark the current revision, or a known revision, to be skipped (e.g.
if that revision is not usable because of another issue):
hg bisect --skip
hg bisect --skip 23
• skip all revisions that do not touch directories foo or bar:
hg bisect --skip "!( file('path:foo') & file('path:bar') )"
• forget the current bisection:
hg bisect --reset
• use 'make && make tests' to automatically find the first broken revi-
sion:
hg bisect --reset
hg bisect --bad 34
hg bisect --good 12
hg bisect --command "make && make tests"
• see all changesets whose states are already known in the current bi-
section:
hg log -r "bisect(pruned)"
• see the changeset currently being bisected (especially useful if run-
ning with -U/--noupdate):
hg log -r "bisect(current)"
• see all changesets that took part in the current bisection:
hg log -r "bisect(range)"
• you can even get a nice graph:
hg log --graph -r "bisect(range)"
See hg help revisions.bisect for more about the bisect() predicate.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-r, --reset
reset bisect state
-g, --good
mark changeset good
-b, --bad
mark changeset bad
-s, --skip
skip testing changeset
-e, --extend
extend the bisect range
-c,--command <CMD>
use command to check changeset state
-U, --noupdate
do not update to target
heads
show branch heads:
hg heads [-ct] [-r STARTREV] [REV]...
With no arguments, show all open branch heads in the repository.
Branch heads are changesets that have no descendants on the same
branch. They are where development generally takes place and are the
usual targets for update and merge operations.
If one or more REVs are given, only open branch heads on the branches
associated with the specified changesets are shown. This means that you
can use hg heads . to see the heads on the currently checked-out
branch.
If -c/--closed is specified, also show branch heads marked closed (see
hg commit --close-branch).
If STARTREV is specified, only those heads that are descendants of
STARTREV will be displayed.
If -t/--topo is specified, named branch mechanics will be ignored and
only topological heads (changesets with no children) will be shown.
Returns 0 if matching heads are found, 1 if not.
Options:
-r,--rev <STARTREV>
show only heads which are descendants of STARTREV
-t, --topo
show topological heads only
-a, --active
show active branchheads only (DEPRECATED)
-c, --closed
show normal and closed branch heads
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
identify
identify the working directory or specified revision:
hg identify [-nibtB] [-r REV] [SOURCE]
Print a summary identifying the repository state at REV using one or
two parent hash identifiers, followed by a "+" if the working directory
has uncommitted changes, the branch name (if not default), a list of
tags, and a list of bookmarks.
When REV is not given, print a summary of the current state of the
repository including the working directory. Specify -r. to get informa-
tion of the working directory parent without scanning uncommitted
changes.
Specifying a path to a repository root or Mercurial bundle will cause
lookup to operate on that repository/bundle.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template
keywords and functions. See also hg help templates.
dirty String. Character + denoting if the working directory has uncom-
mitted changes.
id String. One or two nodes, optionally followed by +.
parents
List of strings. Parent nodes of the changeset.
Examples:
• generate a build identifier for the working directory:
hg id --id > build-id.dat
• find the revision corresponding to a tag:
hg id -n -r 1.3
• check the most recent revision of a remote repository:
hg id -r tip https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/
See hg log for generating more information about specific revisions,
including full hash identifiers.
Returns 0 if successful.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
identify the specified revision
-n, --num
show local revision number
-i, --id
show global revision id
-b, --branch
show branch
-t, --tags
show tags
-B, --bookmarks
show bookmarks
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
aliases: id
log
show revision history of entire repository or files:
hg log [OPTION]... [FILE]
Print the revision history of the specified files or the entire
project.
If no revision range is specified, the default is tip:0 unless --follow
is set.
File history is shown without following rename or copy history of
files. Use -f/--follow with a filename to follow history across renames
and copies. --follow without a filename will only show ancestors of the
starting revisions. The starting revisions can be specified by
-r/--rev, which default to the working directory parent.
By default this command prints revision number and changeset id, tags,
non-trivial parents, user, date and time, and a summary for each com-
mit. When the -v/--verbose switch is used, the list of changed files
and full commit message are shown.
With --graph the revisions are shown as an ASCII art DAG with the most
recent changeset at the top. 'o' is a changeset, '@' is a working di-
rectory parent, '%' is a changeset involved in an unresolved merge con-
flict, '_' closes a branch, 'x' is obsolete, '*' is unstable, and '+'
represents a fork where the changeset from the lines below is a parent
of the 'o' merge on the same line. Paths in the DAG are represented
with '|', '/' and so forth. ':' in place of a '|' indicates one or more
revisions in a path are omitted.
Use -L/--line-range FILE,M:N options to follow the history of lines
from M to N in FILE. With -p/--patch only diff hunks affecting speci-
fied line range will be shown. This option requires --follow; it can be
specified multiple times. Currently, this option is not compatible with
--graph. This option is experimental.
Note hg log --patch may generate unexpected diff output for merge
changesets, as it will only compare the merge changeset against
its first parent. Also, only files different from BOTH parents
will appear in files:.
Note For performance reasons, hg log FILE may omit duplicate changes
made on branches and will not show removals or mode changes. To
see all such changes, use the --removed switch.
Note The history resulting from -L/--line-range options depends on
diff options; for instance if white-spaces are ignored, respec-
tive changes with only white-spaces in specified line range will
not be listed.
Some examples:
• changesets with full descriptions and file lists:
hg log -v
• changesets ancestral to the working directory:
hg log -f
• last 10 commits on the current branch:
hg log -l 10 -b .
• changesets showing all modifications of a file, including removals:
hg log --removed file.c
• all changesets that touch a directory, with diffs, excluding merges:
hg log -Mp lib/
• all revision numbers that match a keyword:
hg log -k bug --template "{rev}\n"
• the full hash identifier of the working directory parent:
hg log -r . --template "{node}\n"
• list available log templates:
hg log -T list
• check if a given changeset is included in a tagged release:
hg log -r "a21ccf and ancestor(1.9)"
• find all changesets by some user in a date range:
hg log -k alice -d "may 2008 to jul 2008"
• summary of all changesets after the last tag:
hg log -r "last(tagged())::" --template "{desc|firstline}\n"
• changesets touching lines 13 to 23 for file.c:
hg log -L file.c,13:23
• changesets touching lines 13 to 23 for file.c and lines 2 to 6 of
main.c with patch:
hg log -L file.c,13:23 -L main.c,2:6 -p
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
See hg help revisions for more about specifying and ordering revisions.
See hg help templates for more about pre-packaged styles and specifying
custom templates. The default template used by the log command can be
customized via the command-templates.log configuration setting.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-f, --follow
follow changeset history, or file history across copies and re-
names
--follow-first
only follow the first parent of merge changesets (DEPRECATED)
-d,--date <DATE>
show revisions matching date spec
-C, --copies
show copied files
-k,--keyword <TEXT[+]>
do case-insensitive search for a given text
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
revisions to select or follow from
-L,--line-range <FILE,RANGE[+]>
follow line range of specified file (EXPERIMENTAL)
--removed
include revisions where files were removed
-m, --only-merges
show only merges (DEPRECATED) (use -r "merge()" instead)
-u,--user <USER[+]>
revisions committed by user
--only-branch <BRANCH[+]>
show only changesets within the given named branch (DEPRECATED)
-b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
show changesets within the given named branch
-B,--bookmark <BOOKMARK[+]>
show changesets within the given bookmark
-P,--prune <REV[+]>
do not display revision or any of its ancestors
-p, --patch
show patch
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
-l,--limit <NUM>
limit number of changes displayed
-M, --no-merges
do not show merges
--stat output diffstat-style summary of changes
-G, --graph
show the revision DAG
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: history
parents
show the parents of the working directory or revision (DEPRECATED):
hg parents [-r REV] [FILE]
Print the working directory's parent revisions. If a revision is given
via -r/--rev, the parent of that revision will be printed. If a file
argument is given, the revision in which the file was last changed (be-
fore the working directory revision or the argument to --rev if given)
is printed.
This command is equivalent to:
hg log -r "p1()+p2()" or
hg log -r "p1(REV)+p2(REV)" or
hg log -r "max(::p1() and file(FILE))+max(::p2() and file(FILE))" or
hg log -r "max(::p1(REV) and file(FILE))+max(::p2(REV) and file(FILE))"
See hg summary and hg help revsets for related information.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
show parents of the specified revision
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
tip
show the tip revision (DEPRECATED):
hg tip [-p] [-g]
The tip revision (usually just called the tip) is the changeset most
recently added to the repository (and therefore the most recently
changed head).
If you have just made a commit, that commit will be the tip. If you
have just pulled changes from another repository, the tip of that
repository becomes the current tip. The "tip" tag is special and cannot
be renamed or assigned to a different changeset.
This command is deprecated, please use hg heads instead.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-p, --patch
show patch
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
Working directory management
add
add the specified files on the next commit:
hg add [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Schedule files to be version controlled and added to the repository.
The files will be added to the repository at the next commit. To undo
an add before that, see hg forget.
If no names are given, add all files to the repository (except files
matching .hgignore).
Examples:
• New (unknown) files are added automatically by hg add:
$ ls
foo.c
$ hg status
? foo.c
$ hg add
adding foo.c
$ hg status
A foo.c
• Specific files to be added can be specified:
$ ls
bar.c foo.c
$ hg status
? bar.c
? foo.c
$ hg add bar.c
$ hg status
A bar.c
? foo.c
Returns 0 if all files are successfully added.
Options:
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
addremove
add all new files, delete all missing files:
hg addremove [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Add all new files and remove all missing files from the repository.
Unless names are given, new files are ignored if they match any of the
patterns in .hgignore. As with add, these changes take effect at the
next commit.
Use the -s/--similarity option to detect renamed files. This option
takes a percentage between 0 (disabled) and 100 (files must be identi-
cal) as its parameter. With a parameter greater than 0, this compares
every removed file with every added file and records those similar
enough as renames. Detecting renamed files this way can be expensive.
After using this option, hg status -C can be used to check which files
were identified as moved or renamed. If not specified, -s/--similarity
defaults to 100 and only renames of identical files are detected.
Examples:
• A number of files (bar.c and foo.c) are new, while foobar.c has
been removed (without using hg remove) from the repository:
$ ls
bar.c foo.c
$ hg status
! foobar.c
? bar.c
? foo.c
$ hg addremove
adding bar.c
adding foo.c
removing foobar.c
$ hg status
A bar.c
A foo.c
R foobar.c
• A file foobar.c was moved to foo.c without using hg rename. Af-
terwards, it was edited slightly:
$ ls
foo.c
$ hg status
! foobar.c
? foo.c
$ hg addremove --similarity 90
removing foobar.c
adding foo.c
recording removal of foobar.c as rename to foo.c (94% similar)
$ hg status -C
A foo.c
foobar.c
R foobar.c
Returns 0 if all files are successfully added.
Options:
-s,--similarity <SIMILARITY>
guess renamed files by similarity (0<=s<=100)
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
files
list tracked files:
hg files [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Print files under Mercurial control in the working directory or speci-
fied revision for given files (excluding removed files). Files can be
specified as filenames or filesets.
If no files are given to match, this command prints the names of all
files under Mercurial control.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template
keywords and functions. See also hg help templates.
flags String. Character denoting file's symlink and executable bits.
path String. Repository-absolute path of the file.
size Integer. Size of the file in bytes.
Examples:
• list all files under the current directory:
hg files .
• shows sizes and flags for current revision:
hg files -vr .
• list all files named README:
hg files -I "**/README"
• list all binary files:
hg files "set:binary()"
• find files containing a regular expression:
hg files "set:grep('bob')"
• search tracked file contents with xargs and grep:
hg files -0 | xargs -0 grep foo
See hg help patterns and hg help filesets for more information on spec-
ifying file patterns.
Returns 0 if a match is found, 1 otherwise.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
search the repository as it is in REV
-0, --print0
end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
forget
forget the specified files on the next commit:
hg forget [OPTION]... FILE...
Mark the specified files so they will no longer be tracked after the
next commit.
This only removes files from the current branch, not from the entire
project history, and it does not delete them from the working direc-
tory.
To delete the file from the working directory, see hg remove.
To undo a forget before the next commit, see hg add.
Examples:
• forget newly-added binary files:
hg forget "set:added() and binary()"
• forget files that would be excluded by .hgignore:
hg forget "set:hgignore()"
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-i, --interactive
use interactive mode
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
locate
locate files matching specific patterns (DEPRECATED):
hg locate [OPTION]... [PATTERN]...
Print files under Mercurial control in the working directory whose
names match the given patterns.
By default, this command searches all directories in the working direc-
tory. To search just the current directory and its subdirectories, use
"--include .".
If no patterns are given to match, this command prints the names of all
files under Mercurial control in the working directory.
If you want to feed the output of this command into the "xargs" com-
mand, use the -0 option to both this command and "xargs". This will
avoid the problem of "xargs" treating single filenames that contain
whitespace as multiple filenames.
See hg help files for a more versatile command.
Returns 0 if a match is found, 1 otherwise.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
search the repository as it is in REV
-0, --print0
end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs
-f, --fullpath
print complete paths from the filesystem root
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
purge
removes files not tracked by Mercurial:
hg purge [OPTION]... [DIR]...
Delete files not known to Mercurial. This is useful to test local and
uncommitted changes in an otherwise-clean source tree.
This means that purge will delete the following by default:
• Unknown files: files marked with "?" by hg status
• Empty directories: in fact Mercurial ignores directories unless they
contain files under source control management
But it will leave untouched:
• Modified and unmodified tracked files
• Ignored files (unless -i or --all is specified)
• New files added to the repository (with hg add)
The --files and --dirs options can be used to direct purge to delete
only files, only directories, or both. If neither option is given, both
will be deleted.
If directories are given on the command line, only files in these di-
rectories are considered.
Be careful with purge, as you could irreversibly delete some files you
forgot to add to the repository. If you only want to print the list of
files that this program would delete, use the --print option.
Options:
-a, --abort-on-err
abort if an error occurs
--all purge ignored files too
-i, --ignored
purge only ignored files
--dirs purge empty directories
--files
purge files
-p, --print
print filenames instead of deleting them
-0, --print0
end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs (implies -p/--print)
--confirm
ask before permanently deleting files
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: clean
remove
remove the specified files on the next commit:
hg remove [OPTION]... FILE...
Schedule the indicated files for removal from the current branch.
This command schedules the files to be removed at the next commit. To
undo a remove before that, see hg revert. To undo added files, see hg
forget.
-A/--after can be used to remove only files that have already been
deleted, -f/--force can be used to force deletion, and -Af can be used
to remove files from the next revision without deleting them from the
working directory.
The following table details the behavior of remove for different file
states (columns) and option combinations (rows). The file states are
Added [A], Clean [C], Modified [M] and Missing [!] (as reported by hg
status). The actions are Warn, Remove (from branch) and Delete (from
disk):
┌──────────┬───┬────┬────┬───┐
│opt/state │ A │ C │ M │ ! │
├──────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤
│none │ W │ RD │ W │ R │
├──────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤
│-f │ R │ RD │ RD │ R │
├──────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤
│-A │ W │ W │ W │ R │
├──────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤
│-Af │ R │ R │ R │ R │
└──────────┴───┴────┴────┴───┘
Note hg remove never deletes files in Added [A] state from the work-
ing directory, not even if --force is specified.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if any warnings encountered.
Options:
-A, --after
record delete for missing files
-f, --force
forget added files, delete modified files
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: rm
rename
rename files; equivalent of copy + remove:
hg rename [OPTION]... SOURCE... DEST
Mark dest as copies of sources; mark sources for deletion. If dest is a
directory, copies are put in that directory. If dest is a file, there
can only be one source.
By default, this command copies the contents of files as they exist in
the working directory. If invoked with -A/--after, the operation is
recorded, but no copying is performed.
To undo marking a destination file as renamed, use --forget. With that
option, all given (positional) arguments are unmarked as renames. The
destination file(s) will be left in place (still tracked). The source
file(s) will not be restored. Note that hg rename --forget behaves the
same way as hg copy --forget.
This command takes effect with the next commit by default.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if errors are encountered.
Options:
--forget
unmark a destination file as renamed
-A, --after
record a rename that has already occurred
--at-rev <REV>
(un)mark renames in the given revision (EXPERIMENTAL)
-f, --force
forcibly move over an existing managed file
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: move mv
resolve
redo merges or set/view the merge status of files:
hg resolve [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Merges with unresolved conflicts are often the result of non-interac-
tive merging using the internal:merge configuration setting, or a com-
mand-line merge tool like diff3. The resolve command is used to manage
the files involved in a merge, after hg merge has been run, and before
hg commit is run (i.e. the working directory must have two parents).
See hg help merge-tools for information on configuring merge tools.
The resolve command can be used in the following ways:
• hg resolve [--re-merge] [--tool TOOL] FILE...: attempt to re-merge
the specified files, discarding any previous merge attempts. Re-merg-
ing is not performed for files already marked as resolved. Use
--all/-a to select all unresolved files. --tool can be used to spec-
ify the merge tool used for the given files. It overrides the HGMERGE
environment variable and your configuration files. Previous file
contents are saved with a .orig suffix.
• hg resolve -m [FILE]: mark a file as having been resolved (e.g. after
having manually fixed-up the files). The default is to mark all unre-
solved files.
• hg resolve -u [FILE]...: mark a file as unresolved. The default is to
mark all resolved files.
• hg resolve -l: list files which had or still have conflicts. In the
printed list, U = unresolved and R = resolved. You can use set:unre-
solved() or set:resolved() to filter the list. See hg help filesets
for details.
Note Mercurial will not let you commit files with unresolved merge
conflicts. You must use hg resolve -m ... before you can commit
after a conflicting merge.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template
keywords and functions. See also hg help templates.
mergestatus
String. Character denoting merge conflicts, U or R.
path String. Repository-absolute path of the file.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if any files fail a resolve attempt.
Options:
-a, --all
select all unresolved files
-l, --list
list state of files needing merge
-m, --mark
mark files as resolved
-u, --unmark
mark files as unresolved
-n, --no-status
hide status prefix
--re-merge
re-merge files
-t,--tool <TOOL>
specify merge tool
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
revert
restore files to their checkout state:
hg revert [OPTION]... [-r REV] [NAME]...
Note To check out earlier revisions, you should use hg update REV.
To cancel an uncommitted merge (and lose your changes), use hg
merge --abort.
With no revision specified, revert the specified files or directories
to the contents they had in the parent of the working directory. This
restores the contents of files to an unmodified state and unschedules
adds, removes, copies, and renames. If the working directory has two
parents, you must explicitly specify a revision.
Using the -r/--rev or -d/--date options, revert the given files or di-
rectories to their states as of a specific revision. Because revert
does not change the working directory parents, this will cause these
files to appear modified. This can be helpful to "back out" some or all
of an earlier change. See hg backout for a related method.
Modified files are saved with a .orig suffix before reverting. To dis-
able these backups, use --no-backup. It is possible to store the backup
files in a custom directory relative to the root of the repository by
setting the ui.origbackuppath configuration option.
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
See hg help backout for a way to reverse the effect of an earlier
changeset.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-a, --all
revert all changes when no arguments given
-d,--date <DATE>
tipmost revision matching date
-r,--rev <REV>
revert to the specified revision
-C, --no-backup
do not save backup copies of files
-i, --interactive
interactively select the changes
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
root
print the root (top) of the current working directory:
hg root
Print the root directory of the current repository.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template
keywords and functions. See also hg help templates.
hgpath String. Path to the .hg directory.
storepath
String. Path to the directory holding versioned data.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
shelve
save and set aside changes from the working directory:
hg shelve [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Shelving takes files that "hg status" reports as not clean, saves the
modifications to a bundle (a shelved change), and reverts the files so
that their state in the working directory becomes clean.
To restore these changes to the working directory, using "hg unshelve";
this will work even if you switch to a different commit.
When no files are specified, "hg shelve" saves all not-clean files. If
specific files or directories are named, only changes to those files
are shelved.
In bare shelve (when no files are specified, without interactive, in-
clude and exclude option), shelving remembers information if the work-
ing directory was on newly created branch, in other words working di-
rectory was on different branch than its first parent. In this situa-
tion unshelving restores branch information to the working directory.
Each shelved change has a name that makes it easier to find later. The
name of a shelved change defaults to being based on the active book-
mark, or if there is no active bookmark, the current named branch. To
specify a different name, use --name.
To see a list of existing shelved changes, use the --list option. For
each shelved change, this will print its name, age, and description;
use --patch or --stat for more details.
To delete specific shelved changes, use --delete. To delete all shelved
changes, use --cleanup.
Options:
-A, --addremove
mark new/missing files as added/removed before shelving
-u, --unknown
store unknown files in the shelve
--cleanup
delete all shelved changes
--date <DATE>
shelve with the specified commit date
-d, --delete
delete the named shelved change(s)
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-k, --keep
shelve, but keep changes in the working directory
-l, --list
list current shelves
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as shelve message
-n,--name <NAME>
use the given name for the shelved commit
-p, --patch
output patches for changes (provide the names of the shelved
changes as positional arguments)
-i, --interactive
interactive mode
--stat output diffstat-style summary of changes (provide the names of
the shelved changes as positional arguments)
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
status
show changed files in the working directory:
hg status [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Show status of files in the repository. If names are given, only files
that match are shown. Files that are clean or ignored or the source of
a copy/move operation, are not listed unless -c/--clean, -i/--ignored,
-C/--copies or -A/--all are given. Unless options described with "show
only ..." are given, the options -mardu are used.
Option -q/--quiet hides untracked (unknown and ignored) files unless
explicitly requested with -u/--unknown or -i/--ignored.
Note hg status may appear to disagree with diff if permissions have
changed or a merge has occurred. The standard diff format does
not report permission changes and diff only reports changes rel-
ative to one merge parent.
If one revision is given, it is used as the base revision. If two re-
visions are given, the differences between them are shown. The --change
option can also be used as a shortcut to list the changed files of a
revision from its first parent.
The codes used to show the status of files are:
M = modified
A = added
R = removed
C = clean
! = missing (deleted by non-hg command, but still tracked)
? = not tracked
I = ignored
= origin of the previous file (with --copies)
The -t/--terse option abbreviates the output by showing only the direc-
tory name if all the files in it share the same status. The option
takes an argument indicating the statuses to abbreviate: 'm' for 'modi-
fied', 'a' for 'added', 'r' for 'removed', 'd' for 'deleted', 'u' for
'unknown', 'i' for 'ignored' and 'c' for clean.
It abbreviates only those statuses which are passed. Note that clean
and ignored files are not displayed with '--terse ic' unless the
-c/--clean and -i/--ignored options are also used.
The -v/--verbose option shows information when the repository is in an
unfinished merge, shelve, rebase state etc. You can have this behavior
turned on by default by enabling the commands.status.verbose option.
You can skip displaying some of these states by setting commands.sta-
tus.skipstates to one or more of: 'bisect', 'graft', 'histedit',
'merge', 'rebase', or 'unshelve'.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template
keywords and functions. See also hg help templates.
path String. Repository-absolute path of the file.
source String. Repository-absolute path of the file originated from.
Available if --copies is specified.
status String. Character denoting file's status.
Examples:
• show changes in the working directory relative to a changeset:
hg status --rev 9353
• show changes in the working directory relative to the current direc-
tory (see hg help patterns for more information):
hg status re:
• show all changes including copies in an existing changeset:
hg status --copies --change 9353
• get a NUL separated list of added files, suitable for xargs:
hg status -an0
• show more information about the repository status, abbreviating
added, removed, modified, deleted, and untracked paths:
hg status -v -t mardu
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-A, --all
show status of all files
-m, --modified
show only modified files
-a, --added
show only added files
-r, --removed
show only removed files
-d, --deleted
show only missing files
-c, --clean
show only files without changes
-u, --unknown
show only unknown (not tracked) files
-i, --ignored
show only ignored files
-n, --no-status
hide status prefix
-t,--terse <VALUE>
show the terse output (EXPERIMENTAL) (default: nothing)
-C, --copies
show source of copied files (DEFAULT: ui.statuscopies)
-0, --print0
end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs
--rev <REV[+]>
show difference from revision
--change <REV>
list the changed files of a revision
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: st
summary
summarize working directory state:
hg summary [--remote]
This generates a brief summary of the working directory state, includ-
ing parents, branch, commit status, phase and available updates.
With the --remote option, this will check the default paths for incom-
ing and outgoing changes. This can be time-consuming.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
--remote
check for push and pull
aliases: sum
unshelve
restore a shelved change to the working directory:
hg unshelve [OPTION]... [[-n] SHELVED]
This command accepts an optional name of a shelved change to restore.
If none is given, the most recent shelved change is used.
If a shelved change is applied successfully, the bundle that contains
the shelved changes is moved to a backup location (.hg/shelve-backup).
Since you can restore a shelved change on top of an arbitrary commit,
it is possible that unshelving will result in a conflict between your
changes and the commits you are unshelving onto. If this occurs, you
must resolve the conflict, then use --continue to complete the unshelve
operation. (The bundle will not be moved until you successfully com-
plete the unshelve.)
(Alternatively, you can use --abort to abandon an unshelve that causes
a conflict. This reverts the unshelved changes, and leaves the bundle
in place.)
If bare shelved change (without interactive, include and exclude op-
tion) was done on newly created branch it would restore branch informa-
tion to the working directory.
After a successful unshelve, the shelved changes are stored in a backup
directory. Only the N most recent backups are kept. N defaults to 10
but can be overridden using the shelve.maxbackups configuration option.
Timestamp in seconds is used to decide order of backups. More than
maxbackups backups are kept, if same timestamp prevents from deciding
exact order of them, for safety.
Selected changes can be unshelved with --interactive flag. The working
directory is updated with the selected changes, and only the unselected
changes remain shelved. Note: The whole shelve is applied to working
directory first before running interactively. So, this will bring up
all the conflicts between working directory and the shelve, irrespec-
tive of which changes will be unshelved.
Options:
-a, --abort
abort an incomplete unshelve operation
-c, --continue
continue an incomplete unshelve operation
-i, --interactive
use interactive mode (EXPERIMENTAL)
-k, --keep
keep shelve after unshelving
-n,--name <NAME>
restore shelved change with given name
-t,--tool <VALUE>
specify merge tool
--date <DATE>
set date for temporary commits (DEPRECATED)
update
update working directory (or switch revisions):
hg update [-C|-c|-m] [-d DATE] [[-r] REV]
Update the repository's working directory to the specified changeset.
If no changeset is specified, update to the tip of the current named
branch and move the active bookmark (see hg help bookmarks).
Update sets the working directory's parent revision to the specified
changeset (see hg help parents).
If the changeset is not a descendant or ancestor of the working direc-
tory's parent and there are uncommitted changes, the update is aborted.
With the -c/--check option, the working directory is checked for uncom-
mitted changes; if none are found, the working directory is updated to
the specified changeset.
The -C/--clean, -c/--check, and -m/--merge options control what happens
if the working directory contains uncommitted changes. At most of one
of them can be specified.
1. If no option is specified, and if the requested changeset is an an-
cestor or descendant of the working directory's parent, the uncom-
mitted changes are merged into the requested changeset and the
merged result is left uncommitted. If the requested changeset is not
an ancestor or descendant (that is, it is on another branch), the
update is aborted and the uncommitted changes are preserved.
2. With the -m/--merge option, the update is allowed even if the re-
quested changeset is not an ancestor or descendant of the working
directory's parent.
3. With the -c/--check option, the update is aborted and the uncommit-
ted changes are preserved.
4. With the -C/--clean option, uncommitted changes are discarded and
the working directory is updated to the requested changeset.
To cancel an uncommitted merge (and lose your changes), use hg merge
--abort.
Use null as the changeset to remove the working directory (like hg
clone -U).
If you want to revert just one file to an older revision, use hg revert
[-r REV] NAME.
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if there are unresolved files.
Options:
-C, --clean
discard uncommitted changes (no backup)
-c, --check
require clean working directory
-m, --merge
merge uncommitted changes
-d,--date <DATE>
tipmost revision matching date
-r,--rev <REV>
revision
-t,--tool <TOOL>
specify merge tool
aliases: up checkout co
Change import/export
archive
create an unversioned archive of a repository revision:
hg archive [OPTION]... DEST
By default, the revision used is the parent of the working directory;
use -r/--rev to specify a different revision.
The archive type is automatically detected based on file extension (to
override, use -t/--type).
Examples:
• create a zip file containing the 1.0 release:
hg archive -r 1.0 project-1.0.zip
• create a tarball excluding .hg files:
hg archive project.tar.gz -X ".hg*"
Valid types are:
files
a directory full of files (default)
tar
tar archive, uncompressed
tbz2
tar archive, compressed using bzip2
tgz
tar archive, compressed using gzip
txz
tar archive, compressed using lzma (only in Python 3)
uzip
zip archive, uncompressed
zip
zip archive, compressed using deflate
The exact name of the destination archive or directory is given using a
format string; see hg help export for details.
Each member added to an archive file has a directory prefix prepended.
Use -p/--prefix to specify a format string for the prefix. The default
is the basename of the archive, with suffixes removed.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
--no-decode
do not pass files through decoders
-p,--prefix <PREFIX>
directory prefix for files in archive
-r,--rev <REV>
revision to distribute
-t,--type <TYPE>
type of distribution to create
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
bundle
create a bundle file:
hg bundle [-f] [-t BUNDLESPEC] [-a] [-r REV]... [--base REV]... FILE [DEST]...
Generate a bundle file containing data to be transferred to another
repository.
To create a bundle containing all changesets, use -a/--all (or --base
null). Otherwise, hg assumes the destination will have all the nodes
you specify with --base parameters. Otherwise, hg will assume the
repository has all the nodes in destination, or default-push/default if
no destination is specified, where destination is the repositories you
provide through DEST option.
You can change bundle format with the -t/--type option. See hg help
bundlespec for documentation on this format. By default, the most ap-
propriate format is used and compression defaults to bzip2.
The bundle file can then be transferred using conventional means and
applied to another repository with the unbundle or pull command. This
is useful when direct push and pull are not available or when exporting
an entire repository is undesirable.
Applying bundles preserves all changeset contents including permis-
sions, copy/rename information, and revision history.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if no changes found.
Options:
--exact
compute the base from the revision specified
-f, --force
run even when the destination is unrelated
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
a changeset intended to be added to the destination
-b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
a specific branch you would like to bundle
--base <REV[+]>
a base changeset assumed to be available at the destination
-a, --all
bundle all changesets in the repository
-t,--type <TYPE>
bundle compression type to use (default: bzip2)
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
export
dump the header and diffs for one or more changesets:
hg export [OPTION]... [-o OUTFILESPEC] [-r] [REV]...
Print the changeset header and diffs for one or more revisions. If no
revision is given, the parent of the working directory is used.
The information shown in the changeset header is: author, date, branch
name (if non-default), changeset hash, parent(s) and commit comment.
Note hg export may generate unexpected diff output for merge change-
sets, as it will compare the merge changeset against its first
parent only.
Output may be to a file, in which case the name of the file is given
using a template string. See hg help templates. In addition to the com-
mon template keywords, the following formatting rules are supported:
%%
literal "%" character
%H
changeset hash (40 hexadecimal digits)
%N
number of patches being generated
%R
changeset revision number
%b
basename of the exporting repository
%h
short-form changeset hash (12 hexadecimal digits)
%m
first line of the commit message (only alphanumeric characters)
%n
zero-padded sequence number, starting at 1
%r
zero-padded changeset revision number
\
literal "" character
Without the -a/--text option, export will avoid generating diffs of
files it detects as binary. With -a, export will generate a diff any-
way, probably with undesirable results.
With -B/--bookmark changesets reachable by the given bookmark are se-
lected.
Use the -g/--git option to generate diffs in the git extended diff for-
mat. See hg help diffs for more information.
With the --switch-parent option, the diff will be against the second
parent. It can be useful to review a merge.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template
keywords and functions. See also hg help templates.
diff String. Diff content.
parents
List of strings. Parent nodes of the changeset.
Examples:
• use export and import to transplant a bugfix to the current branch:
hg export -r 9353 | hg import -
• export all the changesets between two revisions to a file with rename
information:
hg export --git -r 123:150 > changes.txt
• split outgoing changes into a series of patches with descriptive
names:
hg export -r "outgoing()" -o "%n-%m.patch"
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-B,--bookmark <BOOKMARK>
export changes only reachable by given bookmark
-o,--output <FORMAT>
print output to file with formatted name
--switch-parent
diff against the second parent
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
revisions to export
-a, --text
treat all files as text
-g, --git
use git extended diff format (DEFAULT: diff.git)
--binary
generate binary diffs in git mode (default)
--nodates
omit dates from diff headers
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
import
import an ordered set of patches:
hg import [OPTION]... PATCH...
Import a list of patches and commit them individually (unless --no-com-
mit is specified).
To read a patch from standard input (stdin), use "-" as the patch name.
If a URL is specified, the patch will be downloaded from there.
Import first applies changes to the working directory (unless --bypass
is specified), import will abort if there are outstanding changes.
Use --bypass to apply and commit patches directly to the repository,
without affecting the working directory. Without --exact, patches will
be applied on top of the working directory parent revision.
You can import a patch straight from a mail message. Even patches as
attachments work (to use the body part, it must have type text/plain or
text/x-patch). From and Subject headers of email message are used as
default committer and commit message. All text/plain body parts before
first diff are added to the commit message.
If the imported patch was generated by hg export, user and description
from patch override values from message headers and body. Values given
on command line with -m/--message and -u/--user override these.
If --exact is specified, import will set the working directory to the
parent of each patch before applying it, and will abort if the result-
ing changeset has a different ID than the one recorded in the patch.
This will guard against various ways that portable patch formats and
mail systems might fail to transfer Mercurial data or metadata. See hg
bundle for lossless transmission.
Use --partial to ensure a changeset will be created from the patch even
if some hunks fail to apply. Hunks that fail to apply will be written
to a <target-file>.rej file. Conflicts can then be resolved by hand be-
fore hg commit --amend is run to update the created changeset. This
flag exists to let people import patches that partially apply without
losing the associated metadata (author, date, description, ...).
Note When no hunks apply cleanly, hg import --partial will create an
empty changeset, importing only the patch metadata.
With -s/--similarity, hg will attempt to discover renames and copies in
the patch in the same way as hg addremove.
It is possible to use external patch programs to perform the patch by
setting the ui.patch configuration option. For the default internal
tool, the fuzz can also be configured via patch.fuzz. See hg help con-
fig for more information about configuration files and how to use these
options.
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
Examples:
• import a traditional patch from a website and detect renames:
hg import -s 80 http://example.com/bugfix.patch
• import a changeset from an hgweb server:
hg import https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/rev/5ca8c111e9aa
• import all the patches in an Unix-style mbox:
hg import incoming-patches.mbox
• import patches from stdin:
hg import -
• attempt to exactly restore an exported changeset (not always possi-
ble):
hg import --exact proposed-fix.patch
• use an external tool to apply a patch which is too fuzzy for the de-
fault internal tool.
hg import --config ui.patch="patch --merge" fuzzy.patch
• change the default fuzzing from 2 to a less strict 7
hg import --config ui.fuzz=7 fuzz.patch
Returns 0 on success, 1 on partial success (see --partial).
Options:
-p,--strip <NUM>
directory strip option for patch. This has the same meaning as
the corresponding patch option (default: 1)
-b,--base <PATH>
base path (DEPRECATED)
--secret
use the secret phase for committing
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-f, --force
skip check for outstanding uncommitted changes (DEPRECATED)
--no-commit
don't commit, just update the working directory
--bypass
apply patch without touching the working directory
--partial
commit even if some hunks fail
--exact
abort if patch would apply lossily
--prefix <DIR>
apply patch to subdirectory
--import-branch
use any branch information in patch (implied by --exact)
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
-s,--similarity <SIMILARITY>
guess renamed files by similarity (0<=s<=100)
aliases: patch
unbundle
apply one or more bundle files:
hg unbundle [-u] FILE...
Apply one or more bundle files generated by hg bundle.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if an update has unresolved files.
Options:
-u, --update
update to new branch head if changesets were unbundled
Repository maintenance
manifest
output the current or given revision of the project manifest:
hg manifest [-r REV]
Print a list of version controlled files for the given revision. If no
revision is given, the first parent of the working directory is used,
or the null revision if no revision is checked out.
With -v, print file permissions, symlink and executable bits. With
--debug, print file revision hashes.
If option --all is specified, the list of all files from all revisions
is printed. This includes deleted and renamed files.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
revision to display
--all list files from all revisions
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
recover
roll back an interrupted transaction:
hg recover
Recover from an interrupted commit or pull.
This command tries to fix the repository status after an interrupted
operation. It should only be necessary when Mercurial suggests it.
Returns 0 if successful, 1 if nothing to recover or verify fails.
Options:
--verify
run hg verify after successful recover
rollback
roll back the last transaction (DANGEROUS) (DEPRECATED):
hg rollback
Please use hg commit --amend instead of rollback to correct mistakes in
the last commit.
This command should be used with care. There is only one level of roll-
back, and there is no way to undo a rollback. It will also restore the
dirstate at the time of the last transaction, losing any dirstate
changes since that time. This command does not alter the working direc-
tory.
Transactions are used to encapsulate the effects of all commands that
create new changesets or propagate existing changesets into a reposi-
tory.
For example, the following commands are transactional, and their ef-
fects can be rolled back:
• commit
• import
• pull
• push (with this repository as the destination)
• unbundle
To avoid permanent data loss, rollback will refuse to rollback a commit
transaction if it isn't checked out. Use --force to override this pro-
tection.
The rollback command can be entirely disabled by setting the ui.roll-
back configuration setting to false. If you're here because you want to
use rollback and it's disabled, you can re-enable the command by set-
ting ui.rollback to true.
This command is not intended for use on public repositories. Once
changes are visible for pull by other users, rolling a transaction back
locally is ineffective (someone else may already have pulled the
changes). Furthermore, a race is possible with readers of the reposi-
tory; for example an in-progress pull from the repository may fail if a
rollback is performed.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if no rollback data is available.
Options:
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
-f, --force
ignore safety measures
verify
verify the integrity of the repository:
hg verify
Verify the integrity of the current repository.
This will perform an extensive check of the repository's integrity,
validating the hashes and checksums of each entry in the changelog,
manifest, and tracked files, as well as the integrity of their
crosslinks and indices.
Please see https://mercurial-scm.org/wiki/RepositoryCorruption for more
information about recovery from corruption of the repository.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if errors are encountered.
Options:
--full perform more checks (EXPERIMENTAL)
Help
config
show combined config settings from all hgrc files:
hg config [-u] [NAME]...
With no arguments, print names and values of all config items.
With one argument of the form section.name, print just the value of
that config item.
With multiple arguments, print names and values of all config items
with matching section names or section.names.
With --edit, start an editor on the user-level config file. With
--global, edit the system-wide config file. With --local, edit the
repository-level config file.
With --source, the source (filename and line number) is printed for
each config item.
See hg help config for more information about config files.
--non-shared flag is used to edit .hg/hgrc-not-shared config file.
This file is not shared across shares when in share-safe mode.
Template:
The following keywords are supported. See also hg help templates.
name String. Config name.
source String. Filename and line number where the item is defined.
value String. Config value.
The --shared flag can be used to edit the config file of shared source
repository. It only works when you have shared using the experimental
share safe feature.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if NAME does not exist.
Options:
-u, --untrusted
show untrusted configuration options
--exp-all-known
show all known config option (EXPERIMENTAL)
-e, --edit
edit user config
-l, --local
edit repository config
--source
show source of configuration value
--shared
edit shared source repository config (EXPERIMENTAL)
--non-shared
edit non shared config (EXPERIMENTAL)
-g, --global
edit global config
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
aliases: showconfig debugconfig
help
show help for a given topic or a help overview:
hg help [-eck] [-s PLATFORM] [TOPIC]
With no arguments, print a list of commands with short help messages.
Given a topic, extension, or command name, print help for that topic.
Returns 0 if successful.
Options:
-e, --extension
show only help for extensions
-c, --command
show only help for commands
-k, --keyword
show topics matching keyword
-s,--system <PLATFORM[+]>
show help for specific platform(s)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
version
output version and copyright information:
hg version
Template:
The following keywords are supported. See also hg help templates.
extensions
List of extensions.
ver String. Version number.
And each entry of {extensions} provides the following sub-keywords in
addition to {ver}.
bundled
Boolean. True if included in the release.
name String. Extension name.
Options:
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
Uncategorized commands
BUNDLE FILE FORMATS
Mercurial supports generating standalone "bundle" files that hold
repository data. These "bundles" are typically saved locally and used
later or exchanged between different repositories, possibly on differ-
ent machines. Example commands using bundles are hg bundle and hg un-
bundle.
Generation of bundle files is controlled by a "bundle specification"
("bundlespec") string. This string tells the bundle generation process
how to create the bundle.
A "bundlespec" string is composed of the following elements:
type A string denoting the bundle format to use.
compression
Denotes the compression engine to use compressing the raw bundle
data.
parameters
Arbitrary key-value parameters to further control bundle genera-
tion.
A "bundlespec" string has the following formats:
<type> The literal bundle format string is used.
<compression>-<type>
The compression engine and format are delimited by a hyphen (-).
Optional parameters follow the <type>. Parameters are URI escaped
key=value pairs. Each pair is delimited by a semicolon (;). The first
parameter begins after a ; immediately following the <type> value.
Available Types
The following bundle <type> strings are available:
v1 Produces a legacy "changegroup" version 1 bundle.
This format is compatible with nearly all Mercurial clients be-
cause it is the oldest. However, it has some limitations, which
is why it is no longer the default for new repositories.
v1 bundles can be used with modern repositories using the "gen-
eraldelta" storage format. However, it may take longer to pro-
duce the bundle and the resulting bundle may be significantly
larger than a v2 bundle.
v1 bundles can only use the gzip, bzip2, and none compression
formats.
v2 Produces a version 2 bundle.
Version 2 bundles are an extensible format that can store addi-
tional repository data (such as bookmarks and phases informa-
tion) and they can store data more efficiently, resulting in
smaller bundles.
Version 2 bundles can also use modern compression engines, such
as zstd, making them faster to compress and often smaller.
Available Compression Engines
The following bundle <compression> engines can be used:
bzip2
An algorithm that produces smaller bundles than gzip.
All Mercurial clients should support this format.
This engine will likely produce smaller bundles than gzip but
will be significantly slower, both during compression and decom-
pression.
If available, the zstd engine can yield similar or better com-
pression at much higher speeds.
gzip
zlib compression using the DEFLATE algorithm.
All Mercurial clients should support this format. The compres-
sion algorithm strikes a reasonable balance between compression
ratio and size.
none
No compression is performed.
Use this compression engine to explicitly disable compression.
Available Options
The following options exist:
changegroup
Include the changegroup data in the bundle (default to True).
cg.version
Select the version of the changegroup to use. Available options
are : 01, 02 or 03. By default it will be automatically selected
according to the current repository format.
obsolescence
Include obsolescence-markers relevant to the bundled changesets.
phases Include phase information relevant to the bundled changesets.
revbranchcache
Include the "tags-fnodes" cache inside the bundle.
tagsfnodescache
Include the "tags-fnodes" cache inside the bundle.
Examples
v2
Produce a v2 bundle using default options, including compres-
sion.
none-v1
Produce a v1 bundle with no compression.
zstd-v2
Produce a v2 bundle with zstandard compression using default
settings.
zstd-v1
This errors because zstd is not supported for v1 types.
COLORIZING OUTPUTS
Mercurial colorizes output from several commands.
For example, the diff command shows additions in green and deletions in
red, while the status command shows modified files in magenta. Many
other commands have analogous colors. It is possible to customize these
colors.
To enable color (default) whenever possible use:
[ui]
color = yes
To disable color use:
[ui]
color = no
See hg help config.ui.color for details.
The default pager on Windows does not support color, so enabling the
pager will effectively disable color. See hg help config.ui.paginate
to disable the pager. Alternately, MSYS and Cygwin shells provide less
as a pager, which can be configured to support ANSI color mode. Win-
dows 10 natively supports ANSI color mode.
Mode
Mercurial can use various systems to display color. The supported modes
are ansi, win32, and terminfo. See hg help config.color for details
about how to control the mode.
Effects
Other effects in addition to color, like bold and underlined text, are
also available. By default, the terminfo database is used to find the
terminal codes used to change color and effect. If terminfo is not
available, then effects are rendered with the ECMA-48 SGR control func-
tion (aka ANSI escape codes).
The available effects in terminfo mode are 'blink', 'bold', 'dim', 'in-
verse', 'invisible', 'italic', 'standout', and 'underline'; in ECMA-48
mode, the options are 'bold', 'inverse', 'italic', and 'underline'.
How each is rendered depends on the terminal emulator. Some may not be
available for a given terminal type, and will be silently ignored.
If the terminfo entry for your terminal is missing codes for an effect
or has the wrong codes, you can add or override those codes in your
configuration:
[color]
terminfo.dim = \E[2m
where 'E' is substituted with an escape character.
Labels
Text receives color effects depending on the labels that it has. Many
default Mercurial commands emit labelled text. You can also define your
own labels in templates using the label function, see hg help templates
. A single portion of text may have more than one label. In that case,
effects given to the last label will override any other effects. This
includes the special "none" effect, which nullifies other effects.
Labels are normally invisible. In order to see these labels and their
position in the text, use the global --color=debug option. The same an-
chor text may be associated to multiple labels, e.g.
[log.changeset changeset.secret|changeset: 22611:6f0a53c8f587]
The following are the default effects for some default labels. Default
effects may be overridden from your configuration file:
[color]
status.modified = blue bold underline red_background
status.added = green bold
status.removed = red bold blue_background
status.deleted = cyan bold underline
status.unknown = magenta bold underline
status.ignored = black bold
# 'none' turns off all effects
status.clean = none
status.copied = none
qseries.applied = blue bold underline
qseries.unapplied = black bold
qseries.missing = red bold
diff.diffline = bold
diff.extended = cyan bold
diff.file_a = red bold
diff.file_b = green bold
diff.hunk = magenta
diff.deleted = red
diff.inserted = green
diff.changed = white
diff.tab =
diff.trailingwhitespace = bold red_background
# Blank so it inherits the style of the surrounding label
changeset.public =
changeset.draft =
changeset.secret =
resolve.unresolved = red bold
resolve.resolved = green bold
bookmarks.active = green
branches.active = none
branches.closed = black bold
branches.current = green
branches.inactive = none
tags.normal = green
tags.local = black bold
rebase.rebased = blue
rebase.remaining = red bold
shelve.age = cyan
shelve.newest = green bold
shelve.name = blue bold
histedit.remaining = red bold
Custom colors
Because there are only eight standard colors, Mercurial allows you to
define color names for other color slots which might be available for
your terminal type, assuming terminfo mode. For instance:
color.brightblue = 12
color.pink = 207
color.orange = 202
to set 'brightblue' to color slot 12 (useful for 16 color terminals
that have brighter colors defined in the upper eight) and, 'pink' and
'orange' to colors in 256-color xterm's default color cube. These de-
fined colors may then be used as any of the pre-defined eight, includ-
ing appending '_background' to set the background to that color.
DATE FORMATS
Some commands allow the user to specify a date, e.g.:
• backout, commit, import, tag: Specify the commit date.
• log, revert, update: Select revision(s) by date.
Many date formats are valid. Here are some examples:
• Wed Dec 6 13:18:29 2006 (local timezone assumed)
• Dec 6 13:18 -0600 (year assumed, time offset provided)
• Dec 6 13:18 UTC (UTC and GMT are aliases for +0000)
• Dec 6 (midnight)
• 13:18 (today assumed)
• 3:39 (3:39AM assumed)
• 3:39pm (15:39)
• 2006-12-06 13:18:29 (ISO 8601 format)
• 2006-12-6 13:18
• 2006-12-6
• 12-6
• 12/6
• 12/6/6 (Dec 6 2006)
• today (midnight)
• yesterday (midnight)
• now - right now
Lastly, there is Mercurial's internal format:
• 1165411109 0 (Wed Dec 6 13:18:29 2006 UTC)
This is the internal representation format for dates. The first number
is the number of seconds since the epoch (1970-01-01 00:00 UTC). The
second is the offset of the local timezone, in seconds west of UTC
(negative if the timezone is east of UTC).
The log command also accepts date ranges:
• <DATE - at or before a given date/time
• >DATE - on or after a given date/time
• DATE to DATE - a date range, inclusive
• -DAYS - within a given number of days from today
DEPRECATED FEATURES
Mercurial evolves over time, some features, options, commands may be
replaced by better and more secure alternatives. This topic will help
you migrating your existing usage and/or configuration to newer fea-
tures.
Commands
The following commands are still available but their use are not recom-
mended:
locate
This command has been replaced by hg files.
parents
This command can be replaced by hg summary or hg log with appropriate
revsets. See hg help revsets for more information.
tip
The recommended alternative is hg heads.
Options
web.allowpull
Renamed to allow-pull.
web.allow_push
Renamed to allow-push.
DIFF FORMATS
Mercurial's default format for showing changes between two versions of
a file is compatible with the unified format of GNU diff, which can be
used by GNU patch and many other standard tools.
While this standard format is often enough, it does not encode the fol-
lowing information:
• executable status and other permission bits
• copy or rename information
• changes in binary files
• creation or deletion of empty files
Mercurial also supports the extended diff format from the git VCS which
addresses these limitations. The git diff format is not produced by de-
fault because a few widespread tools still do not understand this for-
mat.
This means that when generating diffs from a Mercurial repository (e.g.
with hg export), you should be careful about things like file copies
and renames or other things mentioned above, because when applying a
standard diff to a different repository, this extra information is
lost. Mercurial's internal operations (like push and pull) are not af-
fected by this, because they use an internal binary format for communi-
cating changes.
To make Mercurial produce the git extended diff format, use the --git
option available for many commands, or set 'git = True' in the [diff]
section of your configuration file. You do not need to set this option
when importing diffs in this format or using them in the mq extension.
ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
HG Path to the 'hg' executable, automatically passed when running
hooks, extensions or external tools. If unset or empty, this is
the hg executable's name if it's frozen, or an executable named
'hg' (with %PATHEXT% [defaulting to COM/EXE/BAT/CMD] extensions
on Windows) is searched.
HGEDITOR
This is the name of the editor to run when committing. See EDI-
TOR.
(deprecated, see hg help config.ui.editor)
HGENCODING
This overrides the default locale setting detected by Mercurial.
This setting is used to convert data including usernames,
changeset descriptions, tag names, and branches. This setting
can be overridden with the --encoding command-line option.
HGENCODINGMODE
This sets Mercurial's behavior for handling unknown characters
while transcoding user input. The default is "strict", which
causes Mercurial to abort if it can't map a character. Other
settings include "replace", which replaces unknown characters,
and "ignore", which drops them. This setting can be overridden
with the --encodingmode command-line option.
HGENCODINGAMBIGUOUS
This sets Mercurial's behavior for handling characters with "am-
biguous" widths like accented Latin characters with East Asian
fonts. By default, Mercurial assumes ambiguous characters are
narrow, set this variable to "wide" if such characters cause
formatting problems.
HGMERGE
An executable to use for resolving merge conflicts. The program
will be executed with three arguments: local file, remote file,
ancestor file.
(deprecated, see hg help config.ui.merge)
HGRCPATH
A list of files or directories to search for configuration
files. Item separator is ":" on Unix, ";" on Windows. If HGRC-
PATH is not set, platform default search path is used. If empty,
only the .hg/hgrc from the current repository is read.
For each element in HGRCPATH:
• if it's a directory, all files ending with .rc are added
• otherwise, the file itself will be added
HGRCSKIPREPO
When set, the .hg/hgrc from repositories are not read.
HGPLAIN
When set, this disables any configuration settings that might
change Mercurial's default output. This includes encoding, de-
faults, verbose mode, debug mode, quiet mode, tracebacks, and
localization. This can be useful when scripting against Mercu-
rial in the face of existing user configuration.
In addition to the features disabled by HGPLAIN=, the following
values can be specified to adjust behavior:
+strictflags
Restrict parsing of command line flags.
Equivalent options set via command line flags or environment
variables are not overridden.
See hg help scripting for details.
HGPLAINEXCEPT
This is a comma-separated list of features to preserve when HG-
PLAIN is enabled. Currently the following values are supported:
alias
Don't remove aliases.
color
Don't disable colored output.
i18n
Preserve internationalization.
revsetalias
Don't remove revset aliases.
templatealias
Don't remove template aliases.
progress
Don't hide progress output.
Setting HGPLAINEXCEPT to anything (even an empty string) will
enable plain mode.
HGUSER This is the string used as the author of a commit. If not set,
available values will be considered in this order:
• HGUSER (deprecated)
• configuration files from the HGRCPATH
• EMAIL
• interactive prompt
• LOGNAME (with @hostname appended)
(deprecated, see hg help config.ui.username)
EMAIL May be used as the author of a commit; see HGUSER.
LOGNAME
May be used as the author of a commit; see HGUSER.
VISUAL This is the name of the editor to use when committing. See EDI-
TOR.
EDITOR Sometimes Mercurial needs to open a text file in an editor for a
user to modify, for example when writing commit messages. The
editor it uses is determined by looking at the environment vari-
ables HGEDITOR, VISUAL and EDITOR, in that order. The first
non-empty one is chosen. If all of them are empty, the editor
defaults to 'vi'.
PYTHONPATH
This is used by Python to find imported modules and may need to
be set appropriately if this Mercurial is not installed sys-
tem-wide.
SAFELY REWRITING HISTORY (EXPERIMENTAL)
Obsolescence markers make it possible to mark changesets that have been
deleted or superseded in a new version of the changeset.
Unlike the previous way of handling such changes, by stripping the old
changesets from the repository, obsolescence markers can be propagated
between repositories. This allows for a safe and simple way of exchang-
ing mutable history and altering it after the fact. Changeset phases
are respected, such that only draft and secret changesets can be al-
tered (see hg help phases for details).
Obsolescence is tracked using "obsolescence markers", a piece of meta-
data tracking which changesets have been made obsolete, potential suc-
cessors for a given changeset, the moment the changeset was marked as
obsolete, and the user who performed the rewriting operation. The mark-
ers are stored separately from standard changeset data can be exchanged
without any of the precursor changesets, preventing unnecessary ex-
change of obsolescence data.
The complete set of obsolescence markers describes a history of change-
set modifications that is orthogonal to the repository history of file
modifications. This changeset history allows for detection and auto-
matic resolution of edge cases arising from multiple users rewriting
the same part of history concurrently.
Current feature status
This feature is still in development.
Instability
Rewriting changesets might introduce instability.
There are two main kinds of instability: orphaning and diverging.
Orphans are changesets left behind when their ancestors are rewritten.
Divergence has two variants:
• Content-divergence occurs when independent rewrites of the same
changesets lead to different results.
• Phase-divergence occurs when the old (obsolete) version of a change-
set becomes public.
It is possible to prevent local creation of orphans by using the fol-
lowing config:
[experimental]
evolution.createmarkers = true
evolution.exchange = true
You can also enable that option explicitly:
[experimental]
evolution.createmarkers = true
evolution.exchange = true
evolution.allowunstable = true
USING ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Mercurial has the ability to add new features through the use of exten-
sions. Extensions may add new commands, add options to existing com-
mands, change the default behavior of commands, or implement hooks.
To enable the "foo" extension, either shipped with Mercurial or in the
Python search path, create an entry for it in your configuration file,
like this:
[extensions]
foo =
You may also specify the full path to an extension:
[extensions]
myfeature = ~/.hgext/myfeature.py
See hg help config for more information on configuration files.
Extensions are not loaded by default for a variety of reasons: they can
increase startup overhead; they may be meant for advanced usage only;
they may provide potentially dangerous abilities (such as letting you
destroy or modify history); they might not be ready for prime time; or
they may alter some usual behaviors of stock Mercurial. It is thus up
to the user to activate extensions as needed.
To explicitly disable an extension enabled in a configuration file of
broader scope, prepend its path with !:
[extensions]
# disabling extension bar residing in /path/to/extension/bar.py
bar = !/path/to/extension/bar.py
# ditto, but no path was supplied for extension baz
baz = !
disabled extensions:
acl hooks for controlling repository access
blackbox
log repository events to a blackbox for debugging
bugzilla
hooks for integrating with the Bugzilla bug tracker
censor erase file content at a given revision
churn command to display statistics about repository history
clonebundles
advertise pre-generated bundles to seed clones
closehead
close arbitrary heads without checking them out first
convert
import revisions from foreign VCS repositories into Mercurial
eol automatically manage newlines in repository files
extdiff
command to allow external programs to compare revisions
factotum
http authentication with factotum
fastexport
export repositories as git fast-import stream
githelp
try mapping git commands to Mercurial commands
gpg commands to sign and verify changesets
hgk browse the repository in a graphical way
highlight
syntax highlighting for hgweb (requires Pygments)
histedit
interactive history editing
keyword
expand keywords in tracked files
largefiles
track large binary files
mq manage a stack of patches
notify hooks for sending email push notifications
patchbomb
command to send changesets as (a series of) patch emails
rebase command to move sets of revisions to a different ancestor
relink recreates hardlinks between repository clones
schemes
extend schemes with shortcuts to repository swarms
share share a common history between several working directories
transplant
command to transplant changesets from another branch
win32mbcs
allow the use of MBCS paths with problematic encodings
zeroconf
discover and advertise repositories on the local network
SPECIFYING FILE SETS
Mercurial supports a functional language for selecting a set of files.
Like other file patterns, this pattern type is indicated by a prefix,
'set:'. The language supports a number of predicates which are joined
by infix operators. Parenthesis can be used for grouping.
Identifiers such as filenames or patterns must be quoted with single or
double quotes if they contain characters outside of
[.*{}[]?/\_a-zA-Z0-9\x80-\xff] or if they match one of the predefined
predicates. This generally applies to file patterns other than globs
and arguments for predicates. Pattern prefixes such as path: may be
specified without quoting.
Special characters can be used in quoted identifiers by escaping them,
e.g., \n is interpreted as a newline. To prevent them from being inter-
preted, strings can be prefixed with r, e.g. r'...'.
See also hg help patterns.
Operators
There is a single prefix operator:
not x
Files not in x. Short form is ! x.
These are the supported infix operators:
x and y
The intersection of files in x and y. Short form is x & y.
x or y
The union of files in x and y. There are two alternative short
forms: x | y and x + y.
x - y
Files in x but not in y.
Predicates
The following predicates are supported:
added()
File that is added according to hg status.
binary()
File that appears to be binary (contains NUL bytes).
clean()
File that is clean according to hg status.
copied()
File that is recorded as being copied.
deleted()
Alias for missing().
encoding(name)
File can be successfully decoded with the given character encod-
ing. May not be useful for encodings other than ASCII and UTF-8.
eol(style)
File contains newlines of the given style (dos, unix, mac). Bi-
nary files are excluded, files with mixed line endings match
multiple styles.
exec()
File that is marked as executable.
grep(regex)
File contains the given regular expression.
hgignore()
File that matches the active .hgignore pattern.
ignored()
File that is ignored according to hg status.
missing()
File that is missing according to hg status.
modified()
File that is modified according to hg status.
portable()
File that has a portable name. (This doesn't include filenames
with case collisions.)
removed()
File that is removed according to hg status.
resolved()
File that is marked resolved according to hg resolve -l.
revs(revs, pattern)
Evaluate set in the specified revisions. If the revset match
multiple revs, this will return file matching pattern in any of
the revision.
size(expression)
File size matches the given expression. Examples:
• size('1k') - files from 1024 to 2047 bytes
• size('< 20k') - files less than 20480 bytes
• size('>= .5MB') - files at least 524288 bytes
• size('4k - 1MB') - files from 4096 bytes to 1048576 bytes
status(base, rev, pattern)
Evaluate predicate using status change between base and rev. Ex-
amples:
• status(3, 7, added()) - matches files added from "3" to "7"
subrepo([pattern])
Subrepositories whose paths match the given pattern.
symlink()
File that is marked as a symlink.
tracked()
File that is under Mercurial control.
unknown()
File that is unknown according to hg status.
unresolved()
File that is marked unresolved according to hg resolve -l.
Examples
Some sample queries:
• Show status of files that appear to be binary in the working direc-
tory:
hg status -A "set:binary()"
• Forget files that are in .hgignore but are already tracked:
hg forget "set:hgignore() and not ignored()"
• Find text files that contain a string:
hg files "set:grep(magic) and not binary()"
• Find C files in a non-standard encoding:
hg files "set:**.c and not encoding('UTF-8')"
• Revert copies of large binary files:
hg revert "set:copied() and binary() and size('>1M')"
• Revert files that were added to the working directory:
hg revert "set:revs('wdir()', added())"
• Remove files listed in foo.lst that contain the letter a or b:
hg remove "set: listfile:foo.lst and (**a* or **b*)"
COMMAND-LINE FLAGS
Most Mercurial commands accept various flags.
Flag names
Flags for each command are listed in hg help for that command. Addi-
tionally, some flags, such as --repository, are global and can be used
with any command - those are seen in hg help -v, and can be specified
before or after the command.
Every flag has at least a long name, such as --repository. Some flags
may also have a short one-letter name, such as the equivalent -R. Using
the short or long name is equivalent and has the same effect. The long
name may be abbreviated to any unambiguous prefix. For example, hg com-
mit --amend can be abbreviated to hg commit --am.
Flags that have a short name can also be bundled together - for in-
stance, to specify both --edit (short -e) and --interactive (short -i),
one could use:
hg commit -ei
If any of the bundled flags takes a value (i.e. is not a boolean), it
must be last, followed by the value:
hg commit -im 'Message'
Flag types
Mercurial command-line flags can be strings, numbers, booleans, or
lists of strings.
Specifying flag values
The following syntaxes are allowed, assuming a flag 'flagname' with
short name 'f':
--flagname=foo
--flagname foo
-f foo
-ffoo
This syntax applies to all non-boolean flags (strings, numbers or
lists).
Specifying boolean flags
Boolean flags do not take a value parameter. To specify a boolean, use
the flag name to set it to true, or the same name prefixed with 'no-'
to set it to false:
hg commit --interactive
hg commit --no-interactive
Specifying list flags
List flags take multiple values. To specify them, pass the flag multi-
ple times:
hg files --include mercurial --include tests
Setting flag defaults
In order to set a default value for a flag in an hgrc file, it is rec-
ommended to use aliases:
[alias]
commit = commit --interactive
For more information on hgrc files, see hg help config.
Overriding flags on the command line
If the same non-list flag is specified multiple times on the command
line, the latest specification is used:
hg commit -m "Ignored value" -m "Used value"
This includes the use of aliases - e.g., if one has:
[alias]
committemp = commit -m "Ignored value"
then the following command will override that -m:
hg committemp -m "Used value"
Overriding flag defaults
Every flag has a default value, and you may also set your own defaults
in hgrc as described above. Except for list flags, defaults can be
overridden on the command line simply by specifying the flag in that
location.
Hidden flags
Some flags are not shown in a command's help by default - specifically,
those that are deemed to be experimental, deprecated or advanced. To
show all flags, add the --verbose flag for the help command:
hg help --verbose commit
GLOSSARY
Ancestor
Any changeset that can be reached by an unbroken chain of parent
changesets from a given changeset. More precisely, the ancestors
of a changeset can be defined by two properties: a parent of a
changeset is an ancestor, and a parent of an ancestor is an an-
cestor. See also: 'Descendant'.
Bookmark
Bookmarks are pointers to certain commits that move when commit-
ting. They are similar to tags in that it is possible to use
bookmark names in all places where Mercurial expects a changeset
ID, e.g., with hg update. Unlike tags, bookmarks move along when
you make a commit.
Bookmarks can be renamed, copied and deleted. Bookmarks are lo-
cal, unless they are explicitly pushed or pulled between reposi-
tories. Pushing and pulling bookmarks allow you to collaborate
with others on a branch without creating a named branch.
Branch (Noun) A child changeset that has been created from a parent
that is not a head. These are known as topological branches, see
'Branch, topological'. If a topological branch is named, it be-
comes a named branch. If a topological branch is not named, it
becomes an anonymous branch. See 'Branch, anonymous' and
'Branch, named'.
Branches may be created when changes are pulled from or pushed
to a remote repository, since new heads may be created by these
operations. Note that the term branch can also be used infor-
mally to describe a development process in which certain devel-
opment is done independently of other development. This is some-
times done explicitly with a named branch, but it can also be
done locally, using bookmarks or clones and anonymous branches.
Example: "The experimental branch."
(Verb) The action of creating a child changeset which results in
its parent having more than one child.
Example: "I'm going to branch at X."
Branch, anonymous
Every time a new child changeset is created from a parent that
is not a head and the name of the branch is not changed, a new
anonymous branch is created.
Branch, closed
A named branch whose branch heads have all been closed.
Branch, default
The branch assigned to a changeset when no name has previously
been assigned.
Branch head
See 'Head, branch'.
Branch, inactive
If a named branch has no topological heads, it is considered to
be inactive. As an example, a feature branch becomes inactive
when it is merged into the default branch. The hg branches com-
mand shows inactive branches by default, though they can be hid-
den with hg branches --active.
NOTE: this concept is deprecated because it is too implicit.
Branches should now be explicitly closed using hg commit
--close-branch when they are no longer needed.
Branch, named
A collection of changesets which have the same branch name. By
default, children of a changeset in a named branch belong to the
same named branch. A child can be explicitly assigned to a dif-
ferent branch. See hg help branch, hg help branches and hg com-
mit --close-branch for more information on managing branches.
Named branches can be thought of as a kind of namespace, divid-
ing the collection of changesets that comprise the repository
into a collection of disjoint subsets. A named branch is not
necessarily a topological branch. If a new named branch is cre-
ated from the head of another named branch, or the default
branch, but no further changesets are added to that previous
branch, then that previous branch will be a branch in name only.
Branch tip
See 'Tip, branch'.
Branch, topological
Every time a new child changeset is created from a parent that
is not a head, a new topological branch is created. If a topo-
logical branch is named, it becomes a named branch. If a topo-
logical branch is not named, it becomes an anonymous branch of
the current, possibly default, branch.
Changelog
A record of the changesets in the order in which they were added
to the repository. This includes details such as changeset id,
author, commit message, date, and list of changed files.
Changeset
A snapshot of the state of the repository used to record a
change.
Changeset, child
The converse of parent changeset: if P is a parent of C, then C
is a child of P. There is no limit to the number of children
that a changeset may have.
Changeset id
A SHA-1 hash that uniquely identifies a changeset. It may be
represented as either a "long" 40 hexadecimal digit string, or a
"short" 12 hexadecimal digit string.
Changeset, merge
A changeset with two parents. This occurs when a merge is com-
mitted.
Changeset, parent
A revision upon which a child changeset is based. Specifically,
a parent changeset of a changeset C is a changeset whose node
immediately precedes C in the DAG. Changesets have at most two
parents.
Checkout
(Noun) The working directory being updated to a specific revi-
sion. This use should probably be avoided where possible, as
changeset is much more appropriate than checkout in this con-
text.
Example: "I'm using checkout X."
(Verb) Updating the working directory to a specific changeset.
See hg help update.
Example: "I'm going to check out changeset X."
Child changeset
See 'Changeset, child'.
Close changeset
See 'Head, closed branch'.
Closed branch
See 'Branch, closed'.
Clone (Noun) An entire or partial copy of a repository. The partial
clone must be in the form of a revision and its ancestors.
Example: "Is your clone up to date?"
(Verb) The process of creating a clone, using hg clone.
Example: "I'm going to clone the repository."
Closed branch head
See 'Head, closed branch'.
Commit (Noun) A synonym for changeset.
Example: "Is the bug fixed in your recent commit?"
(Verb) The act of recording changes to a repository. When files
are committed in a working directory, Mercurial finds the dif-
ferences between the committed files and their parent changeset,
creating a new changeset in the repository.
Example: "You should commit those changes now."
Cset A common abbreviation of the term changeset.
DAG The repository of changesets of a distributed version control
system (DVCS) can be described as a directed acyclic graph
(DAG), consisting of nodes and edges, where nodes correspond to
changesets and edges imply a parent -> child relation. This
graph can be visualized by graphical tools such as hg log
--graph. In Mercurial, the DAG is limited by the requirement for
children to have at most two parents.
Deprecated
Feature removed from documentation, but not scheduled for re-
moval.
Default branch
See 'Branch, default'.
Descendant
Any changeset that can be reached by a chain of child changesets
from a given changeset. More precisely, the descendants of a
changeset can be defined by two properties: the child of a
changeset is a descendant, and the child of a descendant is a
descendant. See also: 'Ancestor'.
Diff (Noun) The difference between the contents and attributes of
files in two changesets or a changeset and the current working
directory. The difference is usually represented in a standard
form called a "diff" or "patch". The "git diff" format is used
when the changes include copies, renames, or changes to file at-
tributes, none of which can be represented/handled by classic
"diff" and "patch".
Example: "Did you see my correction in the diff?"
(Verb) Diffing two changesets is the action of creating a diff
or patch.
Example: "If you diff with changeset X, you will see what I
mean."
Directory, working
The working directory represents the state of the files tracked
by Mercurial, that will be recorded in the next commit. The
working directory initially corresponds to the snapshot at an
existing changeset, known as the parent of the working direc-
tory. See 'Parent, working directory'. The state may be modified
by changes to the files introduced manually or by a merge. The
repository metadata exists in the .hg directory inside the work-
ing directory.
Draft Changesets in the draft phase have not been shared with publish-
ing repositories and may thus be safely changed by history-modi-
fying extensions. See hg help phases.
Experimental
Feature that may change or be removed at a later date.
Graph See DAG and hg log --graph.
Head The term 'head' may be used to refer to both a branch head or a
repository head, depending on the context. See 'Head, branch'
and 'Head, repository' for specific definitions.
Heads are where development generally takes place and are the
usual targets for update and merge operations.
Head, branch
A changeset with no descendants on the same named branch.
Head, closed branch
A changeset that marks a head as no longer interesting. The
closed head is no longer listed by hg heads. A branch is consid-
ered closed when all its heads are closed and consequently is
not listed by hg branches.
Closed heads can be re-opened by committing new changeset as the
child of the changeset that marks a head as closed.
Head, repository
A topological head which has not been closed.
Head, topological
A changeset with no children in the repository.
History, immutable
Once committed, changesets cannot be altered. Extensions which
appear to change history actually create new changesets that re-
place existing ones, and then destroy the old changesets. Doing
so in public repositories can result in old changesets being
reintroduced to the repository.
History, rewriting
The changesets in a repository are immutable. However, exten-
sions to Mercurial can be used to alter the repository, usually
in such a way as to preserve changeset contents.
Immutable history
See 'History, immutable'.
Merge changeset
See 'Changeset, merge'.
Manifest
Each changeset has a manifest, which is the list of files that
are tracked by the changeset.
Merge Used to bring together divergent branches of work. When you up-
date to a changeset and then merge another changeset, you bring
the history of the latter changeset into your working directory.
Once conflicts are resolved (and marked), this merge may be com-
mitted as a merge changeset, bringing two branches together in
the DAG.
Named branch
See 'Branch, named'.
Null changeset
The empty changeset. It is the parent state of newly-initialized
repositories and repositories with no checked out revision. It
is thus the parent of root changesets and the effective ancestor
when merging unrelated changesets. Can be specified by the alias
'null' or by the changeset ID '000000000000'.
Parent See 'Changeset, parent'.
Parent changeset
See 'Changeset, parent'.
Parent, working directory
The working directory parent reflects a virtual revision which
is the child of the changeset (or two changesets with an uncom-
mitted merge) shown by hg parents. This is changed with hg up-
date. Other commands to see the working directory parent are hg
summary and hg id. Can be specified by the alias ".".
Patch (Noun) The product of a diff operation.
Example: "I've sent you my patch."
(Verb) The process of using a patch file to transform one
changeset into another.
Example: "You will need to patch that revision."
Phase A per-changeset state tracking how the changeset has been or
should be shared. See hg help phases.
Public Changesets in the public phase have been shared with publishing
repositories and are therefore considered immutable. See hg help
phases.
Pull An operation in which changesets in a remote repository which
are not in the local repository are brought into the local
repository. Note that this operation without special arguments
only updates the repository, it does not update the files in the
working directory. See hg help pull.
Push An operation in which changesets in a local repository which are
not in a remote repository are sent to the remote repository.
Note that this operation only adds changesets which have been
committed locally to the remote repository. Uncommitted changes
are not sent. See hg help push.
Repository
The metadata describing all recorded states of a collection of
files. Each recorded state is represented by a changeset. A
repository is usually (but not always) found in the .hg subdi-
rectory of a working directory. Any recorded state can be recre-
ated by "updating" a working directory to a specific changeset.
Repository head
See 'Head, repository'.
Revision
A state of the repository at some point in time. Earlier revi-
sions can be updated to by using hg update. See also 'Revision
number'; See also 'Changeset'.
Revision number
This integer uniquely identifies a changeset in a specific
repository. It represents the order in which changesets were
added to a repository, starting with revision number 0. Note
that the revision number may be different in each clone of a
repository. To identify changesets uniquely between different
clones, see 'Changeset id'.
Revlog History storage mechanism used by Mercurial. It is a form of
delta encoding, with occasional full revision of data followed
by delta of each successive revision. It includes data and an
index pointing to the data.
Rewriting history
See 'History, rewriting'.
Root A changeset that has only the null changeset as its parent. Most
repositories have only a single root changeset.
Secret Changesets in the secret phase may not be shared via push, pull,
or clone. See hg help phases.
Tag An alternative name given to a changeset. Tags can be used in
all places where Mercurial expects a changeset ID, e.g., with hg
update. The creation of a tag is stored in the history and will
thus automatically be shared with other using push and pull.
Tip The changeset with the highest revision number. It is the
changeset most recently added in a repository.
Tip, branch
The head of a given branch with the highest revision number.
When a branch name is used as a revision identifier, it refers
to the branch tip. See also 'Branch, head'. Note that because
revision numbers may be different in different repository
clones, the branch tip may be different in different cloned
repositories.
Update (Noun) Another synonym of changeset.
Example: "I've pushed an update."
(Verb) This term is usually used to describe updating the state
of the working directory to that of a specific changeset. See hg
help update.
Example: "You should update."
Working directory
See 'Directory, working'.
Working directory parent
See 'Parent, working directory'.
SYNTAX FOR MERCURIAL IGNORE FILES
Synopsis
The Mercurial system uses a file called .hgignore in the root directory
of a repository to control its behavior when it searches for files that
it is not currently tracking.
Description
The working directory of a Mercurial repository will often contain
files that should not be tracked by Mercurial. These include backup
files created by editors and build products created by compilers.
These files can be ignored by listing them in a .hgignore file in the
root of the working directory. The .hgignore file must be created manu-
ally. It is typically put under version control, so that the settings
will propagate to other repositories with push and pull.
An untracked file is ignored if its path relative to the repository
root directory, or any prefix path of that path, is matched against any
pattern in .hgignore.
For example, say we have an untracked file, file.c, at a/b/file.c in-
side our repository. Mercurial will ignore file.c if any pattern in
.hgignore matches a/b/file.c, a/b or a.
In addition, a Mercurial configuration file can reference a set of
per-user or global ignore files. See the ignore configuration key on
the [ui] section of hg help config for details of how to configure
these files.
To control Mercurial's handling of files that it manages, many commands
support the -I and -X options; see hg help <command> and hg help pat-
terns for details.
Files that are already tracked are not affected by .hgignore, even if
they appear in .hgignore. An untracked file X can be explicitly added
with hg add X, even if X would be excluded by a pattern in .hgignore.
Syntax
An ignore file is a plain text file consisting of a list of patterns,
with one pattern per line. Empty lines are skipped. The # character is
treated as a comment character, and the \ character is treated as an
escape character.
Mercurial supports several pattern syntaxes. The default syntax used is
Python/Perl-style regular expressions.
To change the syntax used, use a line of the following form:
syntax: NAME
where NAME is one of the following:
regexp
Regular expression, Python/Perl syntax.
glob
Shell-style glob.
rootglob
A variant of glob that is rooted (see below).
The chosen syntax stays in effect when parsing all patterns that fol-
low, until another syntax is selected.
Neither glob nor regexp patterns are rooted. A glob-syntax pattern of
the form *.c will match a file ending in .c in any directory, and a
regexp pattern of the form \.c$ will do the same. To root a regexp pat-
tern, start it with ^. To get the same effect with glob-syntax, you
have to use rootglob.
Subdirectories can have their own .hgignore settings by adding subin-
clude:path/to/subdir/.hgignore to the root .hgignore. See hg help pat-
terns for details on subinclude: and include:.
Note Patterns specified in other than .hgignore are always rooted.
Please see hg help patterns for details.
Example
Here is an example ignore file.
# use glob syntax.
syntax: glob
*.elc
*.pyc
*~
# switch to regexp syntax.
syntax: regexp
^\.pc/
Debugging
Use the debugignore command to see if and why a file is ignored, or to
see the combined ignore pattern. See hg help debugignore for details.
CONFIGURING HGWEB
Mercurial's internal web server, hgweb, can serve either a single
repository, or a tree of repositories. In the second case, repository
paths and global options can be defined using a dedicated configuration
file common to hg serve, hgweb.wsgi, hgweb.cgi and hgweb.fcgi.
This file uses the same syntax as other Mercurial configuration files
but recognizes only the following sections:
• web
• paths
• collections
The web options are thoroughly described in hg help config.
The paths section maps URL paths to paths of repositories in the
filesystem. hgweb will not expose the filesystem directly - only Mercu-
rial repositories can be published and only according to the configura-
tion.
The left hand side is the path in the URL. Note that hgweb reserves
subpaths like rev or file, try using different names for nested reposi-
tories to avoid confusing effects.
The right hand side is the path in the filesystem. If the specified
path ends with * or ** the filesystem will be searched recursively for
repositories below that point. With * it will not recurse into the
repositories it finds (except for .hg/patches). With ** it will also
search inside repository working directories and possibly find sub-
repositories.
In this example:
[paths]
/projects/a = /srv/tmprepos/a
/projects/b = c:/repos/b
/ = /srv/repos/*
/user/bob = /home/bob/repos/**
• The first two entries make two repositories in different directories
appear under the same directory in the web interface
• The third entry will publish every Mercurial repository found in
/srv/repos/, for instance the repository /srv/repos/quux/ will appear
as http://server/quux/
• The fourth entry will publish both http://server/user/bob/quux/ and
http://server/user/bob/quux/testsubrepo/
The collections section is deprecated and has been superseded by paths.
URLs and Common Arguments
URLs under each repository have the form /{command}[/{arguments}] where
{command} represents the name of a command or handler and {arguments}
represents any number of additional URL parameters to that command.
The web server has a default style associated with it. Styles map to a
collection of named templates. Each template is used to render a spe-
cific piece of data, such as a changeset or diff.
The style for the current request can be overridden two ways. First, if
{command} contains a hyphen (-), the text before the hyphen defines the
style. For example, /atom-log will render the log command handler with
the atom style. The second way to set the style is with the style query
string argument. For example, /log?style=atom. The hyphenated URL pa-
rameter is preferred.
Not all templates are available for all styles. Attempting to use a
style that doesn't have all templates defined may result in an error
rendering the page.
Many commands take a {revision} URL parameter. This defines the change-
set to operate on. This is commonly specified as the short, 12 digit
hexadecimal abbreviation for the full 40 character unique revision
identifier. However, any value described by hg help revisions typically
works.
Commands and URLs
The following web commands and their URLs are available:
/annotate/{revision}/{path}
Show changeset information for each line in a file.
The ignorews, ignorewsamount, ignorewseol, and ignoreblanklines query
string arguments have the same meaning as their [annotate] config
equivalents. It uses the hgrc boolean parsing logic to interpret the
value. e.g. 0 and false are false and 1 and true are true. If not de-
fined, the server default settings are used.
The fileannotate template is rendered.
/archive/{revision}.{format}[/{path}]
Obtain an archive of repository content.
The content and type of the archive is defined by a URL path parameter.
format is the file extension of the archive type to be generated. e.g.
zip or tar.bz2. Not all archive types may be allowed by your server
configuration.
The optional path URL parameter controls content to include in the ar-
chive. If omitted, every file in the specified revision is present in
the archive. If included, only the specified file or contents of the
specified directory will be included in the archive.
No template is used for this handler. Raw, binary content is generated.
/bookmarks
Show information about bookmarks.
No arguments are accepted.
The bookmarks template is rendered.
/branches
Show information about branches.
All known branches are contained in the output, even closed branches.
No arguments are accepted.
The branches template is rendered.
/changelog[/{revision}]
Show information about multiple changesets.
If the optional revision URL argument is absent, information about all
changesets starting at tip will be rendered. If the revision argument
is present, changesets will be shown starting from the specified revi-
sion.
If revision is absent, the rev query string argument may be defined.
This will perform a search for changesets.
The argument for rev can be a single revision, a revision set, or a
literal keyword to search for in changeset data (equivalent to hg log
-k).
The revcount query string argument defines the maximum numbers of
changesets to render.
For non-searches, the changelog template will be rendered.
/changeset[/{revision}]
Show information about a single changeset.
A URL path argument is the changeset identifier to show. See hg help
revisions for possible values. If not defined, the tip changeset will
be shown.
The changeset template is rendered. Contents of the changesettag,
changesetbookmark, filenodelink, filenolink, and the many templates re-
lated to diffs may all be used to produce the output.
/comparison/{revision}/{path}
Show a comparison between the old and new versions of a file from
changes made on a particular revision.
This is similar to the diff handler. However, this form features a
split or side-by-side diff rather than a unified diff.
The context query string argument can be used to control the lines of
context in the diff.
The filecomparison template is rendered.
/diff/{revision}/{path}
Show how a file changed in a particular commit.
The filediff template is rendered.
This handler is registered under both the /diff and /filediff paths.
/diff is used in modern code.
/file/{revision}[/{path}]
Show information about a directory or file in the repository.
Info about the path given as a URL parameter will be rendered.
If path is a directory, information about the entries in that directory
will be rendered. This form is equivalent to the manifest handler.
If path is a file, information about that file will be shown via the
filerevision template.
If path is not defined, information about the root directory will be
rendered.
/diff/{revision}/{path}
Show how a file changed in a particular commit.
The filediff template is rendered.
This handler is registered under both the /diff and /filediff paths.
/diff is used in modern code.
/filelog/{revision}/{path}
Show information about the history of a file in the repository.
The revcount query string argument can be defined to control the maxi-
mum number of entries to show.
The filelog template will be rendered.
/graph[/{revision}]
Show information about the graphical topology of the repository.
Information rendered by this handler can be used to create visual rep-
resentations of repository topology.
The revision URL parameter controls the starting changeset. If it's ab-
sent, the default is tip.
The revcount query string argument can define the number of changesets
to show information for.
The graphtop query string argument can specify the starting changeset
for producing jsdata variable that is used for rendering graph in Java-
Script. By default it has the same value as revision.
This handler will render the graph template.
/help[/{topic}]
Render help documentation.
This web command is roughly equivalent to hg help. If a topic is de-
fined, that help topic will be rendered. If not, an index of available
help topics will be rendered.
The help template will be rendered when requesting help for a topic.
helptopics will be rendered for the index of help topics.
/log[/{revision}[/{path}]]
Show repository or file history.
For URLs of the form /log/{revision}, a list of changesets starting at
the specified changeset identifier is shown. If {revision} is not de-
fined, the default is tip. This form is equivalent to the changelog
handler.
For URLs of the form /log/{revision}/{file}, the history for a specific
file will be shown. This form is equivalent to the filelog handler.
/manifest[/{revision}[/{path}]]
Show information about a directory.
If the URL path arguments are omitted, information about the root di-
rectory for the tip changeset will be shown.
Because this handler can only show information for directories, it is
recommended to use the file handler instead, as it can handle both di-
rectories and files.
The manifest template will be rendered for this handler.
/changeset[/{revision}]
Show information about a single changeset.
A URL path argument is the changeset identifier to show. See hg help
revisions for possible values. If not defined, the tip changeset will
be shown.
The changeset template is rendered. Contents of the changesettag,
changesetbookmark, filenodelink, filenolink, and the many templates re-
lated to diffs may all be used to produce the output.
/shortlog
Show basic information about a set of changesets.
This accepts the same parameters as the changelog handler. The only
difference is the shortlog template will be rendered instead of the
changelog template.
/summary
Show a summary of repository state.
Information about the latest changesets, bookmarks, tags, and branches
is captured by this handler.
The summary template is rendered.
/tags
Show information about tags.
No arguments are accepted.
The tags template is rendered.
TECHNICAL IMPLEMENTATION TOPICS
To access a subtopic, use "hg help internals.{subtopic-name}"
bid-merge
Bid Merge Algorithm
bundle2
Bundle2
bundles
Bundles
cbor CBOR
censor Censor
changegroups
Changegroups
config Config Registrar
dirstate-v2
dirstate-v2 file format
extensions
Extension API
mergestate
Mergestate
requirements
Repository Requirements
revlogs
Revision Logs
wireprotocol
Wire Protocol
wireprotocolrpc
Wire Protocol RPC
wireprotocolv2
Wire Protocol Version 2
MERGE TOOLS
To merge files Mercurial uses merge tools.
A merge tool combines two different versions of a file into a merged
file. Merge tools are given the two files and the greatest common an-
cestor of the two file versions, so they can determine the changes made
on both branches.
Merge tools are used both for hg resolve, hg merge, hg update, hg back-
out and in several extensions.
Usually, the merge tool tries to automatically reconcile the files by
combining all non-overlapping changes that occurred separately in the
two different evolutions of the same initial base file. Furthermore,
some interactive merge programs make it easier to manually resolve con-
flicting merges, either in a graphical way, or by inserting some con-
flict markers. Mercurial does not include any interactive merge pro-
grams but relies on external tools for that.
Available merge tools
External merge tools and their properties are configured in the
merge-tools configuration section - see hgrc(5) - but they can often
just be named by their executable.
A merge tool is generally usable if its executable can be found on the
system and if it can handle the merge. The executable is found if it is
an absolute or relative executable path or the name of an application
in the executable search path. The tool is assumed to be able to handle
the merge if it can handle symlinks if the file is a symlink, if it can
handle binary files if the file is binary, and if a GUI is available if
the tool requires a GUI.
There are some internal merge tools which can be used. The internal
merge tools are:
:dump
Creates three versions of the files to merge, containing the
contents of local, other and base. These files can then be used
to perform a merge manually. If the file to be merged is named
a.txt, these files will accordingly be named a.txt.local,
a.txt.other and a.txt.base and they will be placed in the same
directory as a.txt.
This implies premerge. Therefore, files aren't dumped, if pre-
merge runs successfully. Use :forcedump to forcibly write files
out.
(actual capabilities: binary, symlink)
:fail
Rather than attempting to merge files that were modified on both
branches, it marks them as unresolved. The resolve command must
be used to resolve these conflicts.
(actual capabilities: binary, symlink)
:forcedump
Creates three versions of the files as same as :dump, but omits
premerge.
(actual capabilities: binary, symlink)
:local
Uses the local p1() version of files as the merged version.
(actual capabilities: binary, symlink)
:merge
Uses the internal non-interactive simple merge algorithm for
merging files. It will fail if there are any conflicts and leave
markers in the partially merged file. Markers will have two sec-
tions, one for each side of merge.
:merge-local
Like :merge, but resolve all conflicts non-interactively in fa-
vor of the local p1() changes.
:merge-other
Like :merge, but resolve all conflicts non-interactively in fa-
vor of the other p2() changes.
:merge3
Uses the internal non-interactive simple merge algorithm for
merging files. It will fail if there are any conflicts and leave
markers in the partially merged file. Marker will have three
sections, one from each side of the merge and one for the base
content.
:mergediff
Uses the internal non-interactive simple merge algorithm for
merging files. It will fail if there are any conflicts and leave
markers in the partially merged file. The marker will have two
sections, one with the content from one side of the merge, and
one with a diff from the base content to the content on the
other side. (experimental)
:other
Uses the other p2() version of files as the merged version.
(actual capabilities: binary, symlink)
:prompt
Asks the user which of the local p1() or the other p2() version
to keep as the merged version.
(actual capabilities: binary, symlink)
:tagmerge
Uses the internal tag merge algorithm (experimental).
:union
Uses the internal non-interactive simple merge algorithm for
merging files. It will use both left and right sides for con-
flict regions. No markers are inserted.
Internal tools are always available and do not require a GUI but will
by default not handle symlinks or binary files. See next section for
detail about "actual capabilities" described above.
Choosing a merge tool
Mercurial uses these rules when deciding which merge tool to use:
1. If a tool has been specified with the --tool option to merge or re-
solve, it is used. If it is the name of a tool in the merge-tools
configuration, its configuration is used. Otherwise the specified
tool must be executable by the shell.
2. If the HGMERGE environment variable is present, its value is used
and must be executable by the shell.
3. If the filename of the file to be merged matches any of the patterns
in the merge-patterns configuration section, the first usable merge
tool corresponding to a matching pattern is used.
4. If ui.merge is set it will be considered next. If the value is not
the name of a configured tool, the specified value is used and must
be executable by the shell. Otherwise the named tool is used if it
is usable.
5. If any usable merge tools are present in the merge-tools configura-
tion section, the one with the highest priority is used.
6. If a program named hgmerge can be found on the system, it is used -
but it will by default not be used for symlinks and binary files.
7. If the file to be merged is not binary and is not a symlink, then
internal :merge is used.
8. Otherwise, :prompt is used.
For historical reason, Mercurial treats merge tools as below while ex-
amining rules above.
┌───────────┬────────────────┬────────┬─────────┐
│step │ specified via │ binary │ symlink │
├───────────┼────────────────┼────────┼─────────┤
│ │ --tool │ o/o │ o/o │
│ 1. │ │ │ │
├───────────┼────────────────┼────────┼─────────┤
│ │ HGMERGE │ o/o │ o/o │
│ 2. │ │ │ │
├───────────┼────────────────┼────────┼─────────┤
│ │ merge-patterns │ o/o(*) │ x/?(*) │
│ 3. │ │ │ │
├───────────┼────────────────┼────────┼─────────┤
│ │ ui.merge │ x/?(*) │ x/?(*) │
│ 4. │ │ │ │
└───────────┴────────────────┴────────┴─────────┘
Each capability column indicates Mercurial behavior for internal/exter-
nal merge tools at examining each rule.
• "o": "assume that a tool has capability"
• "x": "assume that a tool does not have capability"
• "?": "check actual capability of a tool"
If merge.strict-capability-check configuration is true, Mercurial
checks capabilities of merge tools strictly in (*) cases above (= each
capability column becomes "?/?"). It is false by default for backward
compatibility.
Note After selecting a merge program, Mercurial will by default at-
tempt to merge the files using a simple merge algorithm first.
Only if it doesn't succeed because of conflicting changes will
Mercurial actually execute the merge program. Whether to use the
simple merge algorithm first can be controlled by the premerge
setting of the merge tool. Premerge is enabled by default unless
the file is binary or a symlink.
See the merge-tools and ui sections of hgrc(5) for details on the con-
figuration of merge tools.
PAGER SUPPORT
Some Mercurial commands can produce a lot of output, and Mercurial will
attempt to use a pager to make those commands more pleasant.
To set the pager that should be used, set the application variable:
[pager]
pager = less -FRX
If no pager is set in the user or repository configuration, Mercurial
uses the environment variable $PAGER. If $PAGER is not set, pager.pager
from the default or system configuration is used. If none of these are
set, a default pager will be used, typically less on Unix and more on
Windows.
On Windows, more is not color aware, so using it effectively disables
color. MSYS and Cygwin shells provide less as a pager, which can be
configured to support ANSI color codes. See hg help con-
fig.color.pagermode to configure the color mode when invoking a pager.
You can disable the pager for certain commands by adding them to the
pager.ignore list:
[pager]
ignore = version, help, update
To ignore global commands like hg version or hg help, you have to spec-
ify them in your user configuration file.
To control whether the pager is used at all for an individual command,
you can use --pager=<value>:
• use as needed: auto.
• require the pager: yes or on.
• suppress the pager: no or off (any unrecognized value will also
work).
To globally turn off all attempts to use a pager, set:
[ui]
paginate = never
which will prevent the pager from running.
FILE NAME PATTERNS
Mercurial accepts several notations for identifying one or more files
at a time.
By default, Mercurial treats filenames verbatim without pattern match-
ing, relative to the current working directory. Note that your system
shell might perform pattern matching of its own before passing file-
names into Mercurial.
Alternate pattern notations must be specified explicitly.
Note Patterns specified in .hgignore are not rooted. Please see hg
help hgignore for details.
To use a plain path name without any pattern matching, start it with
path:. These path names must completely match starting at the current
repository root, and when the path points to a directory, it is matched
recursively. To match all files in a directory non-recursively (not in-
cluding any files in subdirectories), rootfilesin: can be used, speci-
fying an absolute path (relative to the repository root).
To use an extended glob, start a name with glob:. Globs are rooted at
the current directory; a glob such as *.c will only match files in the
current directory ending with .c. rootglob: can be used instead of
glob: for a glob that is rooted at the root of the repository.
The supported glob syntax extensions are ** to match any string across
path separators and {a,b} to mean "a or b".
To use a Perl/Python regular expression, start a name with re:. Regexp
pattern matching is anchored at the root of the repository.
To read name patterns from a file, use listfile: or listfile0:. The
latter expects null delimited patterns while the former expects line
feeds. Each string read from the file is itself treated as a file pat-
tern.
To read a set of patterns from a file, use include: or subinclude:.
include: will use all the patterns from the given file and treat them
as if they had been passed in manually. subinclude: will only apply
the patterns against files that are under the subinclude file's direc-
tory. See hg help hgignore for details on the format of these files.
All patterns, except for glob: specified in command line (not for -I or
-X options), can match also against directories: files under matched
directories are treated as matched. For -I and -X options, glob: will
match directories recursively.
Plain examples:
path:foo/bar a name bar in a directory named foo in the root
of the repository
path:path:name a file or directory named "path:name"
rootfilesin:foo/bar the files in a directory called foo/bar, but not any files
in its subdirectories and not a file bar in directory foo
Glob examples:
glob:*.c any name ending in ".c" in the current directory
*.c any name ending in ".c" in the current directory
**.c any name ending in ".c" in any subdirectory of the
current directory including itself.
foo/* any file in directory foo
foo/** any file in directory foo plus all its subdirectories,
recursively
foo/*.c any name ending in ".c" in the directory foo
foo/**.c any name ending in ".c" in any subdirectory of foo
including itself.
rootglob:*.c any name ending in ".c" in the root of the repository
Regexp examples:
re:.*\.c$ any name ending in ".c", anywhere in the repository
File examples:
listfile:list.txt read list from list.txt with one file pattern per line
listfile0:list.txt read list from list.txt with null byte delimiters
See also hg help filesets.
Include examples:
include:path/to/mypatternfile reads patterns to be applied to all paths
subinclude:path/to/subignorefile reads patterns specifically for paths in the
subdirectory
WORKING WITH PHASES
What are phases?
Phases are a system for tracking which changesets have been or should
be shared. This helps prevent common mistakes when modifying history
(for instance, with the mq or rebase extensions).
Each changeset in a repository is in one of the following phases:
• public : changeset is visible on a public server
• draft : changeset is not yet published
• secret : changeset should not be pushed, pulled, or cloned
These phases are ordered (public < draft < secret) and no changeset can
be in a lower phase than its ancestors. For instance, if a changeset is
public, all its ancestors are also public. Lastly, changeset phases
should only be changed towards the public phase.
How are phases managed?
For the most part, phases should work transparently. By default, a
changeset is created in the draft phase and is moved into the public
phase when it is pushed to another repository.
Once changesets become public, extensions like mq and rebase will
refuse to operate on them to prevent creating duplicate changesets.
Phases can also be manually manipulated with the hg phase command if
needed. See hg help -v phase for examples.
To make your commits secret by default, put this in your configuration
file:
[phases]
new-commit = secret
Phases and servers
Normally, all servers are publishing by default. This means:
- all draft changesets that are pulled or cloned appear in phase
public on the client
- all draft changesets that are pushed appear as public on both
client and server
- secret changesets are neither pushed, pulled, or cloned
Note Pulling a draft changeset from a publishing server does not mark
it as public on the server side due to the read-only nature of
pull.
Sometimes it may be desirable to push and pull changesets in the draft
phase to share unfinished work. This can be done by setting a reposi-
tory to disable publishing in its configuration file:
[phases]
publish = False
See hg help config for more information on configuration files.
Note Servers running older versions of Mercurial are treated as pub-
lishing.
Note Changesets in secret phase are not exchanged with the server.
This applies to their content: file names, file contents, and
changeset metadata. For technical reasons, the identifier (e.g.
d825e4025e39) of the secret changeset may be communicated to the
server.
Examples
• list changesets in draft or secret phase:
hg log -r "not public()"
• change all secret changesets to draft:
hg phase --draft "secret()"
• forcibly move the current changeset and descendants from public to
draft:
hg phase --force --draft .
• show a list of changeset revisions and each corresponding phase:
hg log --template "{rev} {phase}\n"
• resynchronize draft changesets relative to a remote repository:
hg phase -fd "outgoing(URL)"
See hg help phase for more information on manually manipulating phases.
SPECIFYING REVISIONS
Mercurial supports several ways to specify revisions.
Specifying single revisions
A plain integer is treated as a revision number. Negative integers are
treated as sequential offsets from the tip, with -1 denoting the tip,
-2 denoting the revision prior to the tip, and so forth.
A 40-digit hexadecimal string is treated as a unique revision identi-
fier. A hexadecimal string less than 40 characters long is treated as
a unique revision identifier and is referred to as a short-form identi-
fier. A short-form identifier is only valid if it is the prefix of ex-
actly one full-length identifier.
Any other string is treated as a bookmark, tag, or branch name. A book-
mark is a movable pointer to a revision. A tag is a permanent name as-
sociated with a revision. A branch name denotes the tipmost open branch
head of that branch - or if they are all closed, the tipmost closed
head of the branch. Bookmark, tag, and branch names must not contain
the ":" character.
The reserved name "tip" always identifies the most recent revision.
The reserved name "null" indicates the null revision. This is the revi-
sion of an empty repository, and the parent of revision 0.
The reserved name "." indicates the working directory parent. If no
working directory is checked out, it is equivalent to null. If an un-
committed merge is in progress, "." is the revision of the first par-
ent.
Finally, commands that expect a single revision (like hg update) also
accept revsets (see below for details). When given a revset, they use
the last revision of the revset. A few commands accept two single revi-
sions (like hg diff). When given a revset, they use the first and the
last revisions of the revset.
Specifying multiple revisions
Mercurial supports a functional language for selecting a set of revi-
sions. Expressions in this language are called revsets.
The language supports a number of predicates which are joined by infix
operators. Parenthesis can be used for grouping.
Identifiers such as branch names may need quoting with single or double
quotes if they contain characters like - or if they match one of the
predefined predicates.
Special characters can be used in quoted identifiers by escaping them,
e.g., \n is interpreted as a newline. To prevent them from being inter-
preted, strings can be prefixed with r, e.g. r'...'.
Operators
There is a single prefix operator:
not x
Changesets not in x. Short form is ! x.
These are the supported infix operators:
x::y
A DAG range, meaning all changesets that are descendants of x
and ancestors of y, including x and y themselves. If the first
endpoint is left out, this is equivalent to ancestors(y), if the
second is left out it is equivalent to descendants(x).
An alternative syntax is x..y.
x:y
All changesets with revision numbers between x and y, both in-
clusive. Either endpoint can be left out, they default to 0 and
tip.
x and y
The intersection of changesets in x and y. Short form is x & y.
x or y
The union of changesets in x and y. There are two alternative
short forms: x | y and x + y.
x - y
Changesets in x but not in y.
x % y
Changesets that are ancestors of x but not ancestors of y (i.e.
::x - ::y). This is shorthand notation for only(x, y) (see be-
low). The second argument is optional and, if left out, is
equivalent to only(x).
x^n
The nth parent of x, n == 0, 1, or 2. For n == 0, x; for n ==
1, the first parent of each changeset in x; for n == 2, the sec-
ond parent of changeset in x.
x~n
The nth first ancestor of x; x~0 is x; x~3 is x^^^. For n < 0,
the nth unambiguous descendent of x.
x ## y
Concatenate strings and identifiers into one string.
All other prefix, infix and postfix operators have lower prior-
ity than ##. For example, a1 ## a2~2 is equivalent to (a1 ##
a2)~2.
For example:
[revsetalias]
issue(a1) = grep(r'\bissue[ :]?' ## a1 ## r'\b|\bbug\(' ## a1 ## r'\)')
issue(1234) is equivalent to grep(r'\bissue[
:]?1234\b|\bbug\(1234\)') in this case. This matches against all
of "issue 1234", "issue:1234", "issue1234" and "bug(1234)".
There is a single postfix operator:
x^
Equivalent to x^1, the first parent of each changeset in x.
Patterns
Where noted, predicates that perform string matching can accept a pat-
tern string. The pattern may be either a literal, or a regular expres-
sion. If the pattern starts with re:, the remainder of the pattern is
treated as a regular expression. Otherwise, it is treated as a literal.
To match a pattern that actually starts with re:, use the prefix lit-
eral:.
Matching is case-sensitive, unless otherwise noted. To perform a case-
insensitive match on a case-sensitive predicate, use a regular expres-
sion, prefixed with (?i).
For example, tag(r're:(?i)release') matches "release" or "RELEASE" or
"Release", etc.
Predicates
The following predicates are supported:
adds(pattern)
Changesets that add a file matching pattern.
The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected to be
relative to the current directory and match against a file or a
directory.
all()
All changesets, the same as 0:tip.
ancestor(*changeset)
A greatest common ancestor of the changesets.
Accepts 0 or more changesets. Will return empty list when
passed no args. Greatest common ancestor of a single changeset
is that changeset.
ancestors(set[, depth])
Changesets that are ancestors of changesets in set, including
the given changesets themselves.
If depth is specified, the result only includes changesets up to
the specified generation.
author(string)
Alias for user(string).
bisect(string)
Changesets marked in the specified bisect status:
• good, bad, skip: csets explicitly marked as good/bad/skip
• goods, bads : csets topologically good/bad
• range : csets taking part in the bisection
• pruned : csets that are goods, bads or skipped
• untested : csets whose fate is yet unknown
• ignored : csets ignored due to DAG topology
• current : the cset currently being bisected
bookmark([name])
The named bookmark or all bookmarks.
Pattern matching is supported for name. See hg help revi-
sions.patterns.
branch(string or set)
All changesets belonging to the given branch or the branches of
the given changesets.
Pattern matching is supported for string. See hg help revi-
sions.patterns.
branchpoint()
Changesets with more than one child.
bundle()
Changesets in the bundle.
Bundle must be specified by the -R option.
children(set)
Child changesets of changesets in set.
closed()
Changeset is closed.
commonancestors(set)
Changesets that are ancestors of every changeset in set.
conflictlocal()
The local side of the merge, if currently in an unresolved
merge.
"merge" here includes merge conflicts from e.g. 'hg rebase' or
'hg graft'.
conflictother()
The other side of the merge, if currently in an unresolved
merge.
"merge" here includes merge conflicts from e.g. 'hg rebase' or
'hg graft'.
contains(pattern)
The revision's manifest contains a file matching pattern (but
might not modify it). See hg help patterns for information about
file patterns.
The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected to be
relative to the current directory and match against a file ex-
actly for efficiency.
converted([id])
Changesets converted from the given identifier in the old repos-
itory if present, or all converted changesets if no identifier
is specified.
date(interval)
Changesets within the interval, see hg help dates.
desc(string)
Search commit message for string. The match is case-insensitive.
Pattern matching is supported for string. See hg help revi-
sions.patterns.
descendants(set[, depth])
Changesets which are descendants of changesets in set, including
the given changesets themselves.
If depth is specified, the result only includes changesets up to
the specified generation.
destination([set])
Changesets that were created by a graft, transplant or rebase
operation, with the given revisions specified as the source.
Omitting the optional set is the same as passing all().
diffcontains(pattern)
Search revision differences for when the pattern was added or
removed.
The pattern may be a substring literal or a regular expression.
See hg help revisions.patterns.
draft()
Changeset in draft phase.
expectsize(set[, size])
Return the given revset if size matches the revset size. Abort
if the revset doesn't expect given size. size can either be an
integer range or an integer.
For example, expectsize(0:1, 3:5) will abort as revset size is 2
and 2 is not between 3 and 5 inclusive.
extra(label, [value])
Changesets with the given label in the extra metadata, with the
given optional value.
Pattern matching is supported for value. See hg help revi-
sions.patterns.
file(pattern)
Changesets affecting files matched by pattern.
For a faster but less accurate result, consider using filelog()
instead.
This predicate uses glob: as the default kind of pattern.
filelog(pattern)
Changesets connected to the specified filelog.
For performance reasons, visits only revisions mentioned in the
file-level filelog, rather than filtering through all changesets
(much faster, but doesn't include deletes or duplicate changes).
For a slower, more accurate result, use file().
The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected to be
relative to the current directory and match against a file ex-
actly for efficiency.
first(set, [n])
An alias for limit().
follow([file[, startrev]])
An alias for ::. (ancestors of the working directory's first
parent). If file pattern is specified, the histories of files
matching given pattern in the revision given by startrev are
followed, including copies.
followlines(file, fromline:toline[, startrev=., descend=False])
Changesets modifying file in line range ('fromline', 'toline').
Line range corresponds to 'file' content at 'startrev' and
should hence be consistent with file size. If startrev is not
specified, working directory's parent is used.
By default, ancestors of 'startrev' are returned. If 'descend'
is True, descendants of 'startrev' are returned though renames
are (currently) not followed in this direction.
grep(regex)
Like keyword(string) but accepts a regex. Use grep(r'...') to
ensure special escape characters are handled correctly. Unlike
keyword(string), the match is case-sensitive.
head()
Changeset is a named branch head.
heads(set)
Members of set with no children in set.
hidden()
Hidden changesets.
id(string)
Revision non-ambiguously specified by the given hex string pre-
fix.
keyword(string)
Search commit message, user name, and names of changed files for
string. The match is case-insensitive.
For a regular expression or case sensitive search of these
fields, use grep(regex).
last(set, [n])
Last n members of set, defaulting to 1.
limit(set[, n[, offset]])
First n members of set, defaulting to 1, starting from offset.
matching(revision [, field])
Changesets in which a given set of fields match the set of
fields in the selected revision or set.
To match more than one field pass the list of fields to match
separated by spaces (e.g. author description).
Valid fields are most regular revision fields and some special
fields.
Regular revision fields are description, author, branch, date,
files, phase, parents, substate, user and diff. Note that au-
thor and user are synonyms. diff refers to the contents of the
revision. Two revisions matching their diff will also match
their files.
Special fields are summary and metadata: summary matches the
first line of the description. metadata is equivalent to match-
ing description user date (i.e. it matches the main metadata
fields).
metadata is the default field which is used when no fields are
specified. You can match more than one field at a time.
max(set)
Changeset with highest revision number in set.
merge()
Changeset is a merge changeset.
min(set)
Changeset with lowest revision number in set.
modifies(pattern)
Changesets modifying files matched by pattern.
The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected to be
relative to the current directory and match against a file or a
directory.
named(namespace)
The changesets in a given namespace.
Pattern matching is supported for namespace. See hg help revi-
sions.patterns.
nodefromfile(path)
Read a list of nodes from the file at path.
This applies id(LINE) to each line of the file.
This is useful when the amount of nodes you need to specify gets
too large for the command line.
none()
No changesets.
only(set, [set])
Changesets that are ancestors of the first set that are not an-
cestors of any other head in the repo. If a second set is speci-
fied, the result is ancestors of the first set that are not an-
cestors of the second set (i.e. ::<set1> - ::<set2>).
origin([set])
Changesets that were specified as a source for the grafts,
transplants or rebases that created the given revisions. Omit-
ting the optional set is the same as passing all(). If a
changeset created by these operations is itself specified as a
source for one of these operations, only the source changeset
for the first operation is selected.
outgoing([path])
Changesets not found in the specified destination repository, or
the default push location.
If the location resolve to multiple repositories, the union of
all outgoing changeset will be used.
p1([set])
First parent of changesets in set, or the working directory.
p2([set])
Second parent of changesets in set, or the working directory.
parents([set])
The set of all parents for all changesets in set, or the working
directory.
present(set)
An empty set, if any revision in set isn't found; otherwise, all
revisions in set.
If any of specified revisions is not present in the local repos-
itory, the query is normally aborted. But this predicate allows
the query to continue even in such cases.
public()
Changeset in public phase.
remote([id [,path]])
Local revision that corresponds to the given identifier in a re-
mote repository, if present. Here, the '.' identifier is a syn-
onym for the current local branch.
removes(pattern)
Changesets which remove files matching pattern.
The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected to be
relative to the current directory and match against a file or a
directory.
rev(number)
Revision with the given numeric identifier.
reverse(set)
Reverse order of set.
revset(set)
Strictly interpret the content as a revset.
The content of this special predicate will be strictly inter-
preted as a revset. For example, revset(id(0)) will be inter-
preted as "id(0)" without possible ambiguity with a "id(0)"
bookmark or tag.
roots(set)
Changesets in set with no parent changeset in set.
secret()
Changeset in secret phase.
sort(set[, [-]key... [, ...]])
Sort set by keys. The default sort order is ascending, specify a
key as -key to sort in descending order.
The keys can be:
• rev for the revision number,
• branch for the branch name,
• desc for the commit message (description),
• user for user name (author can be used as an alias),
• date for the commit date
• topo for a reverse topographical sort
• node the nodeid of the revision
• random randomly shuffle revisions
The topo sort order cannot be combined with other sort keys.
This sort takes one optional argument, topo.firstbranch, which
takes a revset that specifies what topographical branches to
prioritize in the sort.
The random sort takes one optional random.seed argument to con-
trol the pseudo-randomness of the result.
subrepo([pattern])
Changesets that add, modify or remove the given subrepo. If no
subrepo pattern is named, any subrepo changes are returned.
tag([name])
The specified tag by name, or all tagged revisions if no name is
given.
Pattern matching is supported for name. See hg help revi-
sions.patterns.
user(string)
User name contains string. The match is case-insensitive.
Pattern matching is supported for string. See hg help revi-
sions.patterns.
Aliases
New predicates (known as "aliases") can be defined, using any combina-
tion of existing predicates or other aliases. An alias definition looks
like:
<alias> = <definition>
in the revsetalias section of a Mercurial configuration file. Arguments
of the form a1, a2, etc. are substituted from the alias into the defi-
nition.
For example,
[revsetalias]
h = heads()
d(s) = sort(s, date)
rs(s, k) = reverse(sort(s, k))
defines three aliases, h, d, and rs. rs(0:tip, author) is exactly
equivalent to reverse(sort(0:tip, author)).
Equivalents
Command line equivalents for hg log:
-f -> ::.
-d x -> date(x)
-k x -> keyword(x)
-m -> merge()
-u x -> user(x)
-b x -> branch(x)
-P x -> !::x
-l x -> limit(expr, x)
Examples
Some sample queries:
• Changesets on the default branch:
hg log -r "branch(default)"
• Changesets on the default branch since tag 1.5 (excluding merges):
hg log -r "branch(default) and 1.5:: and not merge()"
• Open branch heads:
hg log -r "head() and not closed()"
• Changesets between tags 1.3 and 1.5 mentioning "bug" that affect
hgext/*:
hg log -r "1.3::1.5 and keyword(bug) and file('hgext/*')"
• Changesets committed in May 2008, sorted by user:
hg log -r "sort(date('May 2008'), user)"
• Changesets mentioning "bug" or "issue" that are not in a tagged re-
lease:
hg log -r "(keyword(bug) or keyword(issue)) and not ancestors(tag())"
• Update to the commit that bookmark @ is pointing to, without activat-
ing the bookmark (this works because the last revision of the revset
is used):
hg update :@
• Show diff between tags 1.3 and 1.5 (this works because the first and
the last revisions of the revset are used):
hg diff -r 1.3::1.5
RUST IN MERCURIAL
Mercurial can be augmented with Rust extensions for speeding up certain
operations.
Compatibility
Though the Rust extensions are only tested by the project under Linux,
users of MacOS, FreeBSD and other UNIX-likes have been using the Rust
extensions. Your mileage may vary, but by all means do give us feedback
or signal your interest for better support.
No Rust extensions are available for Windows at this time.
Features
The following operations are sped up when using Rust:
• discovery of differences between repositories (pull/push)
• nodemap (see hg help config.format.use-persistent-nodemap)
• all commands using the dirstate (status, commit, diff, add, up-
date, etc.)
• dirstate-v2 (see hg help config.format.use-dirstate-v2)
• iteration over ancestors in a graph
More features are in the works, and improvements on the above listed
are still in progress. For more experimental work see the "rhg" sec-
tion.
Checking for Rust
You may already have the Rust extensions depending on how you install
Mercurial:
$ hg debuginstall | grep -i rust
checking Rust extensions (installed)
checking module policy (rust+c-allow)
If those lines don't even exist, you're using an old version of hg
which does not have any Rust extensions yet.
Installing
You will need cargo to be in your $PATH. See the "MSRV" section for
which version to use.
Using pip
Users of pip can install the Rust extensions with the following com-
mand:
$ pip install mercurial --global-option --rust --no-use-pep517
--no-use-pep517 is here to tell pip to preserve backwards compatibility
with the legacy setup.py system. Mercurial has not yet migrated its
complex setup to the new system, so we still need this to add compiled
extensions.
This might take a couple of minutes because you're compiling every-
thing.
See the "Checking for Rust" section to see if the install succeeded.
From your distribution
Some distributions are shipping Mercurial with Rust extensions enabled
and pre-compiled (meaning you won't have to install cargo), or allow
you to specify an install flag. Check with your specific distribution
for how to do that, or ask their team to add support for hg+Rust!
From source
Please refer to the rust/README.rst file in the Mercurial repository
for instructions on how to install from source.
MSRV
The minimum supported Rust version is currently 1.48.0. The project's
policy is to follow the version from Debian stable, to make the distri-
butions' job easier.
rhg
There exists an experimental pure-Rust version of Mercurial called rhg
with a fallback mechanism for unsupported invocations. It allows for
much faster execution of certain commands while adding no discernable
overhead for the rest.
The only way of trying it out is by building it from source. Please re-
fer to rust/README.rst in the Mercurial repository.
See hg help config.rhg for configuration options.
Contributing
If you would like to help the Rust endeavor, please refer to
rust/README.rst in the Mercurial repository.
USING MERCURIAL FROM SCRIPTS AND AUTOMATION
It is common for machines (as opposed to humans) to consume Mercurial.
This help topic describes some of the considerations for interfacing
machines with Mercurial.
Choosing an Interface
Machines have a choice of several methods to interface with Mercurial.
These include:
• Executing the hg process
• Querying a HTTP server
• Calling out to a command server
Executing hg processes is very similar to how humans interact with Mer-
curial in the shell. It should already be familiar to you.
hg serve can be used to start a server. By default, this will start a
"hgweb" HTTP server. This HTTP server has support for machine-readable
output, such as JSON. For more, see hg help hgweb.
hg serve can also start a "command server." Clients can connect to this
server and issue Mercurial commands over a special protocol. For more
details on the command server, including links to client libraries, see
https://www.mercurial-scm.org/wiki/CommandServer.
hg serve based interfaces (the hgweb and command servers) have the ad-
vantage over simple hg process invocations in that they are likely more
efficient. This is because there is significant overhead to spawn new
Python processes.
Tip If you need to invoke several hg processes in short order and/or
performance is important to you, use of a server-based interface
is highly recommended.
Environment Variables
As documented in hg help environment, various environment variables in-
fluence the operation of Mercurial. The following are particularly rel-
evant for machines consuming Mercurial:
HGPLAIN
If not set, Mercurial's output could be influenced by configura-
tion settings that impact its encoding, verbose mode, localiza-
tion, etc.
It is highly recommended for machines to set this variable when
invoking hg processes.
HGENCODING
If not set, the locale used by Mercurial will be detected from
the environment. If the determined locale does not support dis-
play of certain characters, Mercurial may render these character
sequences incorrectly (often by using "?" as a placeholder for
invalid characters in the current locale).
Explicitly setting this environment variable is a good practice
to guarantee consistent results. "utf-8" is a good choice on
UNIX-like environments.
HGRCPATH
If not set, Mercurial will inherit config options from config
files using the process described in hg help config. This in-
cludes inheriting user or system-wide config files.
When utmost control over the Mercurial configuration is desired,
the value of HGRCPATH can be set to an explicit file with known
good configs. In rare cases, the value can be set to an empty
file or the null device (often /dev/null) to bypass loading of
any user or system config files. Note that these approaches can
have unintended consequences, as the user and system config
files often define things like the username and extensions that
may be required to interface with a repository.
HGRCSKIPREPO
When set, the .hg/hgrc from repositories are not read.
Note that not reading the repository's configuration can have
unintended consequences, as the repository config files can de-
fine things like extensions that are required for access to the
repository.
Command-line Flags
Mercurial's default command-line parser is designed for humans, and is
not robust against malicious input. For instance, you can start a de-
bugger by passing --debugger as an option value:
$ REV=--debugger sh -c 'hg log -r "$REV"'
This happens because several command-line flags need to be scanned
without using a concrete command table, which may be modified while
loading repository settings and extensions.
Since Mercurial 4.4.2, the parsing of such flags may be restricted by
setting HGPLAIN=+strictflags. When this feature is enabled, all early
options (e.g. -R/--repository, --cwd, --config) must be specified first
amongst the other global options, and cannot be injected to an arbi-
trary location:
$ HGPLAIN=+strictflags hg -R "$REPO" log -r "$REV"
In earlier Mercurial versions where +strictflags isn't available, you
can mitigate the issue by concatenating an option value with its flag:
$ hg log -r"$REV" --keyword="$KEYWORD"
Consuming Command Output
It is common for machines to need to parse the output of Mercurial com-
mands for relevant data. This section describes the various techniques
for doing so.
Parsing Raw Command Output
Likely the simplest and most effective solution for consuming command
output is to simply invoke hg commands as you would as a user and parse
their output.
The output of many commands can easily be parsed with tools like grep,
sed, and awk.
A potential downside with parsing command output is that the output of
commands can change when Mercurial is upgraded. While Mercurial does
generally strive for strong backwards compatibility, command output
does occasionally change. Having tests for your automated interactions
with hg commands is generally recommended, but is even more important
when raw command output parsing is involved.
Using Templates to Control Output
Many hg commands support templatized output via the -T/--template argu-
ment. For more, see hg help templates.
Templates are useful for explicitly controlling output so that you get
exactly the data you want formatted how you want it. For example, log
-T {node}\n can be used to print a newline delimited list of changeset
nodes instead of a human-tailored output containing authors, dates, de-
scriptions, etc.
Tip If parsing raw command output is too complicated, consider using
templates to make your life easier.
The -T/--template argument allows specifying pre-defined styles. Mer-
curial ships with the machine-readable styles cbor, json, and xml,
which provide CBOR, JSON, and XML output, respectively. These are use-
ful for producing output that is machine readable as-is.
(Mercurial 5.0 is required for CBOR style.)
Important
The json and xml styles are considered experimental. While they
may be attractive to use for easily obtaining machine-readable
output, their behavior may change in subsequent versions.
These styles may also exhibit unexpected results when dealing
with certain encodings. Mercurial treats things like filenames
as a series of bytes and normalizing certain byte sequences to
JSON or XML with certain encoding settings can lead to sur-
prises.
Command Server Output
If using the command server to interact with Mercurial, you are likely
using an existing library/API that abstracts implementation details of
the command server. If so, this interface layer may perform parsing for
you, saving you the work of implementing it yourself.
Output Verbosity
Commands often have varying output verbosity, even when machine read-
able styles are being used (e.g. -T json). Adding -v/--verbose and
--debug to the command's arguments can increase the amount of data ex-
posed by Mercurial.
An alternate way to get the data you need is by explicitly specifying a
template.
Other Topics
revsets
Revisions sets is a functional query language for selecting a
set of revisions. Think of it as SQL for Mercurial repositories.
Revsets are useful for querying repositories for specific data.
See hg help revsets for more.
share extension
The share extension provides functionality for sharing reposi-
tory data across several working copies. It can even automati-
cally "pool" storage for logically related repositories when
cloning.
Configuring the share extension can lead to significant resource
utilization reduction, particularly around disk space and the
network. This is especially true for continuous integration (CI)
environments.
See hg help -e share for more.
SUBREPOSITORIES
Subrepositories let you nest external repositories or projects into a
parent Mercurial repository, and make commands operate on them as a
group.
Mercurial currently supports Mercurial, Git, and Subversion subreposi-
tories.
Subrepositories are made of three components:
1. Nested repository checkouts. They can appear anywhere in the parent
working directory.
2. Nested repository references. They are defined in .hgsub, which
should be placed in the root of working directory, and tell where
the subrepository checkouts come from. Mercurial subrepositories are
referenced like:
path/to/nested = https://example.com/nested/repo/path
Git and Subversion subrepos are also supported:
path/to/nested = [git]git://example.com/nested/repo/path
path/to/nested = [svn]https://example.com/nested/trunk/path
where path/to/nested is the checkout location relatively to the par-
ent Mercurial root, and https://example.com/nested/repo/path is the
source repository path. The source can also reference a filesystem
path.
Note that .hgsub does not exist by default in Mercurial reposito-
ries, you have to create and add it to the parent repository before
using subrepositories.
3. Nested repository states. They are defined in .hgsubstate, which is
placed in the root of working directory, and capture whatever infor-
mation is required to restore the subrepositories to the state they
were committed in a parent repository changeset. Mercurial automati-
cally record the nested repositories states when committing in the
parent repository.
Note
The .hgsubstate file should not be edited manually.
Adding a Subrepository
If .hgsub does not exist, create it and add it to the parent reposi-
tory. Clone or checkout the external projects where you want it to live
in the parent repository. Edit .hgsub and add the subrepository entry
as described above. At this point, the subrepository is tracked and the
next commit will record its state in .hgsubstate and bind it to the
committed changeset.
Synchronizing a Subrepository
Subrepos do not automatically track the latest changeset of their
sources. Instead, they are updated to the changeset that corresponds
with the changeset checked out in the top-level changeset. This is so
developers always get a consistent set of compatible code and libraries
when they update.
Thus, updating subrepos is a manual process. Simply check out target
subrepo at the desired revision, test in the top-level repo, then com-
mit in the parent repository to record the new combination.
Deleting a Subrepository
To remove a subrepository from the parent repository, delete its refer-
ence from .hgsub, then remove its files.
Interaction with Mercurial Commands
add add does not recurse in subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is speci-
fied. However, if you specify the full path of a file in a sub-
repo, it will be added even without -S/--subrepos specified.
Subversion subrepositories are currently silently ignored.
addremove
addremove does not recurse into subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is
specified. However, if you specify the full path of a directory
in a subrepo, addremove will be performed on it even without
-S/--subrepos being specified. Git and Subversion subreposito-
ries will print a warning and continue.
archive
archive does not recurse in subrepositories unless -S/--subrepos
is specified.
cat Git subrepositories only support exact file matches. Subversion
subrepositories are currently ignored.
commit commit creates a consistent snapshot of the state of the entire
project and its subrepositories. If any subrepositories have
been modified, Mercurial will abort. Mercurial can be made to
instead commit all modified subrepositories by specifying
-S/--subrepos, or setting "ui.commitsubrepos=True" in a configu-
ration file (see hg help config). After there are no longer any
modified subrepositories, it records their state and finally
commits it in the parent repository. The --addremove option
also honors the -S/--subrepos option. However, Git and Subver-
sion subrepositories will print a warning and abort.
diff diff does not recurse in subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is speci-
fied. However, if you specify the full path of a file or direc-
tory in a subrepo, it will be diffed even without -S/--subrepos
being specified. Subversion subrepositories are currently
silently ignored.
files files does not recurse into subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is
specified. However, if you specify the full path of a file or
directory in a subrepo, it will be displayed even without
-S/--subrepos being specified. Git and Subversion subreposito-
ries are currently silently ignored.
forget forget currently only handles exact file matches in subrepos.
Git and Subversion subrepositories are currently silently ig-
nored.
incoming
incoming does not recurse in subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is
specified. Git and Subversion subrepositories are currently
silently ignored.
outgoing
outgoing does not recurse in subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is
specified. Git and Subversion subrepositories are currently
silently ignored.
pull pull is not recursive since it is not clear what to pull prior
to running hg update. Listing and retrieving all subrepositories
changes referenced by the parent repository pulled changesets is
expensive at best, impossible in the Subversion case.
push Mercurial will automatically push all subrepositories first when
the parent repository is being pushed. This ensures new sub-
repository changes are available when referenced by top-level
repositories. Push is a no-op for Subversion subrepositories.
serve serve does not recurse into subrepositories unless -S/--subrepos
is specified. Git and Subversion subrepositories are currently
silently ignored.
status status does not recurse into subrepositories unless -S/--subre-
pos is specified. Subrepository changes are displayed as regular
Mercurial changes on the subrepository elements. Subversion sub-
repositories are currently silently ignored.
remove remove does not recurse into subrepositories unless -S/--subre-
pos is specified. However, if you specify a file or directory
path in a subrepo, it will be removed even without -S/--subre-
pos. Git and Subversion subrepositories are currently silently
ignored.
update update restores the subrepos in the state they were originally
committed in target changeset. If the recorded changeset is not
available in the current subrepository, Mercurial will pull it
in first before updating. This means that updating can require
network access when using subrepositories.
Remapping Subrepositories Sources
A subrepository source location may change during a project life, in-
validating references stored in the parent repository history. To fix
this, rewriting rules can be defined in parent repository hgrc file or
in Mercurial configuration. See the [subpaths] section in hgrc(5) for
more details.
TEMPLATE USAGE
Mercurial allows you to customize output of commands through templates.
You can either pass in a template or select an existing template-style
from the command line, via the --template option.
You can customize output for any "log-like" command: log, outgoing, in-
coming, tip, parents, and heads.
Some built-in styles are packaged with Mercurial. These can be listed
with hg log --template list. Example usage:
$ hg log -r1.0::1.1 --template changelog
A template is a piece of text, with markup to invoke variable expan-
sion:
$ hg log -r1 --template "{node}\n"
b56ce7b07c52de7d5fd79fb89701ea538af65746
Keywords
Strings in curly braces are called keywords. The availability of key-
words depends on the exact context of the templater. These keywords are
usually available for templating a log-like command:
_fast_rank
the rank of a changeset if cached
The rank of a revision is the size of the sub-graph it defines
as a head. Equivalently, the rank of a revision r is the size
of the set ancestors(r), r included.
activebookmark
String. The active bookmark, if it is associated with the
changeset.
author Alias for {user}
bisect String. The changeset bisection status.
bookmarks
List of strings. Any bookmarks associated with the changeset.
Also sets 'active', the name of the active bookmark.
branch String. The name of the branch on which the changeset was com-
mitted.
changessincelatesttag
Integer. All ancestors not in the latest tag.
children
List of strings. The children of the changeset.
date Date information. The date when the changeset was committed.
desc String. The text of the changeset description.
diffstat
String. Statistics of changes with the following format: "modi-
fied files: +added/-removed lines"
extras List of dicts with key, value entries of the 'extras' field of
this changeset.
file_adds
List of strings. Files added by this changeset.
file_copies
List of strings. Files copied in this changeset with their
sources.
file_copies_switch
List of strings. Like "file_copies" but displayed only if the
--copied switch is set.
file_dels
List of strings. Files removed by this changeset.
file_mods
List of strings. Files modified by this changeset.
files List of strings. All files modified, added, or removed by this
changeset.
graphnode
String. The character representing the changeset node in an
ASCII revision graph.
graphwidth
Integer. The width of the graph drawn by 'log --graph' or zero.
index Integer. The current iteration of the loop. (0 indexed)
latesttag
List of strings. The global tags on the most recent globally
tagged ancestor of this changeset. If no such tags exist, the
list consists of the single string "null".
latesttagdistance
Integer. Longest path to the latest tag.
namespaces
Dict of lists. Names attached to this changeset per namespace.
negrev Integer. The repository-local changeset negative revision num-
ber, which counts in the opposite direction.
node String. The changeset identification hash, as a 40 hexadecimal
digit string.
onelinesummary
String. A one-line summary for the ctx (not including trailing
newline). The default template be overridden in command-tem-
plates.oneline-summary.
p1 Changeset. The changeset's first parent. {p1.rev} for the revi-
sion number, and {p1.node} for the identification hash.
p2 Changeset. The changeset's second parent. {p2.rev} for the revi-
sion number, and {p2.node} for the identification hash.
parents
List of strings. The parents of the changeset in "rev:node" for-
mat. If the changeset has only one "natural" parent (the prede-
cessor revision) nothing is shown.
peerurls
A dictionary of repository locations defined in the [paths] sec-
tion of your configuration file.
phase String. The changeset phase name.
reporoot
String. The root directory of the current repository.
rev Integer. The repository-local changeset revision number.
subrepos
List of strings. Updated subrepositories in the changeset.
tags List of strings. Any tags associated with the changeset.
termwidth
Integer. The width of the current terminal.
user String. The unmodified author of the changeset.
verbosity
String. The current output verbosity in 'debug', 'quiet', 'ver-
bose', or ''.
The "date" keyword does not produce human-readable output. If you want
to use a date in your output, you can use a filter to process it. Fil-
ters are functions which return a string based on the input variable.
Be sure to use the stringify filter first when you're applying a
string-input filter to a list-like input variable. You can also use a
chain of filters to get the desired output:
$ hg tip --template "{date|isodate}\n"
2008-08-21 18:22 +0000
Filters
List of filters:
addbreaks
Any text. Add an XHTML "<br />" tag before the end of every line
except the last.
age Date. Returns a human-readable date/time difference between the
given date/time and the current date/time.
basename
Any text. Treats the text as a path, and returns the last compo-
nent of the path after splitting by the path separator. For ex-
ample, "foo/bar/baz" becomes "baz" and "foo/bar//" becomes "".
cbor Any object. Serializes the object to CBOR bytes.
commondir
List of text. Treats each list item as file name with / as path
separator and returns the longest common directory prefix shared
by all list items. Returns the empty string if no common prefix
exists.
The list items are not normalized, i.e. "foo/../bar" is handled
as file "bar" in the directory "foo/..". Leading slashes are ig-
nored.
For example, ["foo/bar/baz", "foo/baz/bar"] becomes "foo" and
["foo/bar", "baz"] becomes "".
count List or text. Returns the length as an integer.
dirname
Any text. Treats the text as a path, and strips the last compo-
nent of the path after splitting by the path separator.
domain Any text. Finds the first string that looks like an email ad-
dress, and extracts just the domain component. Example: User
<user@example.com> becomes example.com.
email Any text. Extracts the first string that looks like an email ad-
dress. Example: User <user@example.com> becomes user@exam-
ple.com.
emailuser
Any text. Returns the user portion of an email address.
escape Any text. Replaces the special XML/XHTML characters "&", "<" and
">" with XML entities, and filters out NUL characters.
fill68 Any text. Wraps the text to fit in 68 columns.
fill76 Any text. Wraps the text to fit in 76 columns.
firstline
Any text. Returns the first line of text.
hex Any text. Convert a binary Mercurial node identifier into its
long hexadecimal representation.
hgdate Date. Returns the date as a pair of numbers: "1157407993 25200"
(Unix timestamp, timezone offset).
isodate
Date. Returns the date in ISO 8601 format: "2009-08-18 13:00
+0200".
isodatesec
Date. Returns the date in ISO 8601 format, including seconds:
"2009-08-18 13:00:13 +0200". See also the rfc3339date filter.
json Any object. Serializes the object to a JSON formatted text.
lower Any text. Converts the text to lowercase.
nonempty
Any text. Returns '(none)' if the string is empty.
obfuscate
Any text. Returns the input text rendered as a sequence of XML
entities.
person Any text. Returns the name before an email address, interpreting
it as per RFC 5322.
reverse
List. Reverses the order of list items.
revescape
Any text. Escapes all "special" characters, except @. Forward
slashes are escaped twice to prevent web servers from prema-
turely unescaping them. For example, "@foo bar/baz" becomes
"@foo%20bar%252Fbaz".
rfc3339date
Date. Returns a date using the Internet date format specified in
RFC 3339: "2009-08-18T13:00:13+02:00".
rfc822date
Date. Returns a date using the same format used in email head-
ers: "Tue, 18 Aug 2009 13:00:13 +0200".
short Changeset hash. Returns the short form of a changeset hash, i.e.
a 12 hexadecimal digit string.
shortbisect
Any text. Treats label as a bisection status, and returns a sin-
gle-character representing the status (G: good, B: bad, S:
skipped, U: untested, I: ignored). Returns single space if text
is not a valid bisection status.
shortdate
Date. Returns a date like "2006-09-18".
slashpath
Any text. Replaces the native path separator with slash.
splitlines
Any text. Split text into a list of lines.
stringify
Any type. Turns the value into text by converting values into
text and concatenating them.
stripdir
Treat the text as path and strip a directory level, if possible.
For example, "foo" and "foo/bar" becomes "foo".
tabindent
Any text. Returns the text, with every non-empty line except the
first starting with a tab character.
upper Any text. Converts the text to uppercase.
urlescape
Any text. Escapes all "special" characters. For example, "foo
bar" becomes "foo%20bar".
user Any text. Returns a short representation of a user name or email
address.
utf8 Any text. Converts from the local character encoding to UTF-8.
Note that a filter is nothing more than a function call, i.e.
expr|filter is equivalent to filter(expr).
Functions
In addition to filters, there are some basic built-in functions:
config(section, name[, default])
Returns the requested hgrc config option as a string.
configbool(section, name[, default])
Returns the requested hgrc config option as a boolean.
configint(section, name[, default])
Returns the requested hgrc config option as an integer.
date(date[, fmt])
Format a date. See hg help dates for formatting strings. The de-
fault is a Unix date format, including the timezone: "Mon Sep 04
15:13:13 2006 0700".
dict([[key=]value...])
Construct a dict from key-value pairs. A key may be omitted if a
value expression can provide an unambiguous name.
diff([includepattern [, excludepattern]])
Show a diff, optionally specifying files to include or exclude.
files(pattern)
All files of the current changeset matching the pattern. See hg
help patterns.
fill(text[, width[, initialident[, hangindent]]])
Fill many paragraphs with optional indentation. See the "fill"
filter.
filter(iterable[, expr])
Remove empty elements from a list or a dict. If expr specified,
it's applied to each element to test emptiness.
get(dict, key)
Get an attribute/key from an object. Some keywords are complex
types. This function allows you to obtain the value of an attri-
bute on these types.
if(expr, then[, else])
Conditionally execute based on the result of an expression.
ifcontains(needle, haystack, then[, else])
Conditionally execute based on whether the item "needle" is in
"haystack".
ifeq(expr1, expr2, then[, else])
Conditionally execute based on whether 2 items are equivalent.
indent(text, indentchars[, firstline])
Indents all non-empty lines with the characters given in the in-
dentchars string. An optional third parameter will override the
indent for the first line only if present.
join(list, sep)
Join items in a list with a delimiter.
label(label, expr)
Apply a label to generated content. Content with a label applied
can result in additional post-processing, such as automatic col-
orization.
latesttag([pattern])
The global tags matching the given pattern on the most recent
globally tagged ancestor of this changeset. If no such tags ex-
ist, the "{tag}" template resolves to the string "null". See hg
help revisions.patterns for the pattern syntax.
localdate(date[, tz])
Converts a date to the specified timezone. The default is local
date.
mailmap(author)
Return the author, updated according to the value set in the
.mailmap file
max(iterable)
Return the max of an iterable
min(iterable)
Return the min of an iterable
mod(a, b)
Calculate a mod b such that a / b + a mod b == a
pad(text, width[, fillchar=' '[, left=False[, truncate=False]]])
Pad text with a fill character.
relpath(path)
Convert a repository-absolute path into a filesystem path rela-
tive to the current working directory.
revset(query[, formatargs...])
Execute a revision set query. See hg help revset.
rstdoc(text, style)
Format reStructuredText.
search(pattern, text)
Look for the first text matching the regular expression pattern.
Groups are accessible as {1}, {2}, ... in %-mapped template.
separate(sep, args...)
Add a separator between non-empty arguments.
shortest(node, minlength=4)
Obtain the shortest representation of a node.
startswith(pattern, text)
Returns the value from the "text" argument if it begins with the
content from the "pattern" argument.
strip(text[, chars])
Strip characters from a string. By default, strips all leading
and trailing whitespace.
sub(pattern, replacement, expression)
Perform text substitution using regular expressions.
subsetparents(rev, revset)
Look up parents of the rev in the sub graph given by the revset.
word(number, text[, separator])
Return the nth word from a string.
Operators
We provide a limited set of infix arithmetic operations on integers:
+ for addition
- for subtraction
* for multiplication
/ for floor division (division rounded to integer nearest -infinity)
Division fulfills the law x = x / y + mod(x, y).
Also, for any expression that returns a list, there is a list operator:
expr % "{template}"
As seen in the above example, {template} is interpreted as a template.
To prevent it from being interpreted, you can use an escape character
\{ or a raw string prefix, r'...'.
The dot operator can be used as a shorthand for accessing a sub item:
• expr.member is roughly equivalent to expr % '{member}' if expr re-
turns a non-list/dict. The returned value is not stringified.
• dict.key is identical to get(dict, 'key').
Aliases
New keywords and functions can be defined in the templatealias section
of a Mercurial configuration file:
<alias> = <definition>
Arguments of the form a1, a2, etc. are substituted from the alias into
the definition.
For example,
[templatealias]
r = rev
rn = "{r}:{node|short}"
leftpad(s, w) = pad(s, w, ' ', True)
defines two symbol aliases, r and rn, and a function alias leftpad().
It's also possible to specify complete template strings, using the tem-
plates section. The syntax used is the general template string syntax.
For example,
[templates]
nodedate = "{node|short}: {date(date, "%Y-%m-%d")}\n"
defines a template, nodedate, which can be called like:
$ hg log -r . -Tnodedate
A template defined in templates section can also be referenced from an-
other template:
$ hg log -r . -T "{rev} {nodedate}"
but be aware that the keywords cannot be overridden by templates. For
example, a template defined as templates.rev cannot be referenced as
{rev}.
A template defined in templates section may have sub templates which
are inserted before/after/between items:
[templates]
myjson = ' {dict(rev, node|short)|json}'
myjson:docheader = '\{\n'
myjson:docfooter = '\n}\n'
myjson:separator = ',\n'
Examples
Some sample command line templates:
• Format lists, e.g. files:
$ hg log -r 0 --template "files:\n{files % ' {file}\n'}"
• Join the list of files with a ", ":
$ hg log -r 0 --template "files: {join(files, ', ')}\n"
• Join the list of files ending with ".py" with a ", ":
$ hg log -r 0 --template "pythonfiles: {join(files('**.py'), ', ')}\n"
• Separate non-empty arguments by a " ":
$ hg log -r 0 --template "{separate(' ', node, bookmarks, tags}\n"
• Modify each line of a commit description:
$ hg log --template "{splitlines(desc) % '**** {line}\n'}"
• Format date:
$ hg log -r 0 --template "{date(date, '%Y')}\n"
• Display date in UTC:
$ hg log -r 0 --template "{localdate(date, 'UTC')|date}\n"
• Output the description set to a fill-width of 30:
$ hg log -r 0 --template "{fill(desc, 30)}"
• Use a conditional to test for the default branch:
$ hg log -r 0 --template "{ifeq(branch, 'default', 'on the main branch',
'on branch {branch}')}\n"
• Append a newline if not empty:
$ hg tip --template "{if(author, '{author}\n')}"
• Label the output for use with the color extension:
$ hg log -r 0 --template "{label('changeset.{phase}', node|short)}\n"
• Invert the firstline filter, i.e. everything but the first line:
$ hg log -r 0 --template "{sub(r'^.*\n?\n?', '', desc)}\n"
• Display the contents of the 'extra' field, one per line:
$ hg log -r 0 --template "{join(extras, '\n')}\n"
• Mark the active bookmark with '*':
$ hg log --template "{bookmarks % '{bookmark}{ifeq(bookmark, active, '*')} '}\n"
• Find the previous release candidate tag, the distance and changes
since the tag:
$ hg log -r . --template "{latesttag('re:^.*-rc$') % '{tag}, {changes}, {distance}'}\n"
• Mark the working copy parent with '@':
$ hg log --template "{ifcontains(rev, revset('.'), '@')}\n"
• Show details of parent revisions:
$ hg log --template "{revset('parents(%d)', rev) % '{desc|firstline}\n'}"
• Show only commit descriptions that start with "template":
$ hg log --template "{startswith('template', firstline(desc))}\n"
• Print the first word of each line of a commit message:
$ hg log --template "{word(0, desc)}\n"
URL PATHS
Valid URLs are of the form:
local/filesystem/path[#revision]
file://local/filesystem/path[#revision]
http://[user[:pass]@]host[:port]/[path][#revision]
https://[user[:pass]@]host[:port]/[path][#revision]
ssh://[user@]host[:port]/[path][#revision]
path://pathname
Paths in the local filesystem can either point to Mercurial reposito-
ries or to bundle files (as created by hg bundle or hg incoming --bun-
dle). See also hg help paths.
An optional identifier after # indicates a particular branch, tag, or
changeset to use from the remote repository. See also hg help revisions
.
Some features, such as pushing to http:// and https:// URLs are only
possible if the feature is explicitly enabled on the remote Mercurial
server.
Note that the security of HTTPS URLs depends on proper configuration of
web.cacerts.
Some notes about using SSH with Mercurial:
• SSH requires an accessible shell account on the destination machine
and a copy of hg in the remote path or specified with remotecmd.
• path is relative to the remote user's home directory by default. Use
an extra slash at the start of a path to specify an absolute path:
ssh://example.com//tmp/repository
• Mercurial doesn't use its own compression via SSH; the right thing to
do is to configure it in your ~/.ssh/config, e.g.:
Host *.mylocalnetwork.example.com
Compression no
Host *
Compression yes
Alternatively specify "ssh -C" as your ssh command in your configura-
tion file or with the --ssh command line option.
These URLs can all be stored in your configuration file with path
aliases under the [paths] section like so:
[paths]
alias1 = URL1
alias2 = URL2
...
You can then use the alias for any command that uses a URL (for example
hg pull alias1 will be treated as hg pull URL1).
Two path aliases are special because they are used as defaults when you
do not provide the URL to a command:
default:
When you create a repository with hg clone, the clone command
saves the location of the source repository as the new reposi-
tory's 'default' path. This is then used when you omit path from
push- and pull-like commands (including incoming and outgoing).
default-push:
The push command will look for a path named 'default-push', and
prefer it over 'default' if both are defined.
These alias can also be use in the path:// scheme:
[paths]
alias1 = URL1
alias2 = path://alias1
...
check hg help config.paths for details about the behavior of such
"sub-path".
EXTENSIONS
This section contains help for extensions that are distributed together
with Mercurial. Help for other extensions is available in the help sys-
tem.
absorb
apply working directory changes to changesets (EXPERIMENTAL)
The absorb extension provides a command to use annotate information to
amend modified chunks into the corresponding non-public changesets.
[absorb]
# only check 50 recent non-public changesets at most
max-stack-size = 50
# whether to add noise to new commits to avoid obsolescence cycle
add-noise = 1
# make `amend --correlated` a shortcut to the main command
amend-flag = correlated
[color]
absorb.description = yellow
absorb.node = blue bold
absorb.path = bold
Commands
Change creation
absorb
incorporate corrections into the stack of draft changesets:
hg absorb [OPTION] [FILE]...
absorb analyzes each change in your working directory and attempts to
amend the changed lines into the changesets in your stack that first
introduced those lines.
If absorb cannot find an unambiguous changeset to amend for a change,
that change will be left in the working directory, untouched. They can
be observed by hg status or hg diff afterwards. In other words, absorb
does not write to the working directory.
Changesets outside the revset ::. and not public() and not merge() will
not be changed.
Changesets that become empty after applying the changes will be
deleted.
By default, absorb will show what it plans to do and prompt for confir-
mation. If you are confident that the changes will be absorbed to the
correct place, run hg absorb -a to apply the changes immediately.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if all chunks were ignored and nothing amended.
Options:
-a, --apply-changes
apply changes without prompting for confirmation
-p, --print-changes
always print which changesets are modified by which changes
-i, --interactive
interactively select which chunks to apply
-e, --edit-lines
edit what lines belong to which changesets before commit (EXPER-
IMENTAL)
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
acl
hooks for controlling repository access
This hook makes it possible to allow or deny write access to given
branches and paths of a repository when receiving incoming changesets
via pretxnchangegroup and pretxncommit.
The authorization is matched based on the local user name on the system
where the hook runs, and not the committer of the original changeset
(since the latter is merely informative).
The acl hook is best used along with a restricted shell like hgsh, pre-
venting authenticating users from doing anything other than pushing or
pulling. The hook is not safe to use if users have interactive shell
access, as they can then disable the hook. Nor is it safe if remote
users share an account, because then there is no way to distinguish
them.
The order in which access checks are performed is:
1. Deny list for branches (section acl.deny.branches)
2. Allow list for branches (section acl.allow.branches)
3. Deny list for paths (section acl.deny)
4. Allow list for paths (section acl.allow)
The allow and deny sections take key-value pairs.
Branch-based Access Control
Use the acl.deny.branches and acl.allow.branches sections to have
branch-based access control. Keys in these sections can be either:
• a branch name, or
• an asterisk, to match any branch;
The corresponding values can be either:
• a comma-separated list containing users and groups, or
• an asterisk, to match anyone;
You can add the "!" prefix to a user or group name to invert the sense
of the match.
Path-based Access Control
Use the acl.deny and acl.allow sections to have path-based access con-
trol. Keys in these sections accept a subtree pattern (with a glob syn-
tax by default). The corresponding values follow the same syntax as the
other sections above.
Bookmark-based Access Control
Use the acl.deny.bookmarks and acl.allow.bookmarks sections to have
bookmark-based access control. Keys in these sections can be either:
• a bookmark name, or
• an asterisk, to match any bookmark;
The corresponding values can be either:
• a comma-separated list containing users and groups, or
• an asterisk, to match anyone;
You can add the "!" prefix to a user or group name to invert the sense
of the match.
Note: for interactions between clients and servers using Mercurial 3.6+
a rejection will generally reject the entire push, for interactions in-
volving older clients, the commit transactions will already be ac-
cepted, and only the bookmark movement will be rejected.
Groups
Group names must be prefixed with an @ symbol. Specifying a group name
has the same effect as specifying all the users in that group.
You can define group members in the acl.groups section. If a group
name is not defined there, and Mercurial is running under a Unix-like
system, the list of users will be taken from the OS. Otherwise, an ex-
ception will be raised.
Example Configuration
[hooks]
# Use this if you want to check access restrictions at commit time
pretxncommit.acl = python:hgext.acl.hook
# Use this if you want to check access restrictions for pull, push,
# bundle and serve.
pretxnchangegroup.acl = python:hgext.acl.hook
[acl]
# Allow or deny access for incoming changes only if their source is
# listed here, let them pass otherwise. Source is "serve" for all
# remote access (http or ssh), "push", "pull" or "bundle" when the
# related commands are run locally.
# Default: serve
sources = serve
[acl.deny.branches]
# Everyone is denied to the frozen branch:
frozen-branch = *
# A bad user is denied on all branches:
* = bad-user
[acl.allow.branches]
# A few users are allowed on branch-a:
branch-a = user-1, user-2, user-3
# Only one user is allowed on branch-b:
branch-b = user-1
# The super user is allowed on any branch:
* = super-user
# Everyone is allowed on branch-for-tests:
branch-for-tests = *
[acl.deny]
# This list is checked first. If a match is found, acl.allow is not
# checked. All users are granted access if acl.deny is not present.
# Format for both lists: glob pattern = user, ..., @group, ...
# To match everyone, use an asterisk for the user:
# my/glob/pattern = *
# user6 will not have write access to any file:
** = user6
# Group "hg-denied" will not have write access to any file:
** = @hg-denied
# Nobody will be able to change "DONT-TOUCH-THIS.txt", despite
# everyone being able to change all other files. See below.
src/main/resources/DONT-TOUCH-THIS.txt = *
[acl.allow]
# if acl.allow is not present, all users are allowed by default
# empty acl.allow = no users allowed
# User "doc_writer" has write access to any file under the "docs"
# folder:
docs/** = doc_writer
# User "jack" and group "designers" have write access to any file
# under the "images" folder:
images/** = jack, @designers
# Everyone (except for "user6" and "@hg-denied" - see acl.deny above)
# will have write access to any file under the "resources" folder
# (except for 1 file. See acl.deny):
src/main/resources/** = *
.hgtags = release_engineer
Examples using the ! prefix
Suppose there's a branch that only a given user (or group) should be
able to push to, and you don't want to restrict access to any other
branch that may be created.
The "!" prefix allows you to prevent anyone except a given user or
group to push changesets in a given branch or path.
In the examples below, we will: 1) Deny access to branch "ring" to any-
one but user "gollum" 2) Deny access to branch "lake" to anyone but
members of the group "hobbit" 3) Deny access to a file to anyone but
user "gollum"
[acl.allow.branches]
# Empty
[acl.deny.branches]
# 1) only 'gollum' can commit to branch 'ring';
# 'gollum' and anyone else can still commit to any other branch.
ring = !gollum
# 2) only members of the group 'hobbit' can commit to branch 'lake';
# 'hobbit' members and anyone else can still commit to any other branch.
lake = !@hobbit
# You can also deny access based on file paths:
[acl.allow]
# Empty
[acl.deny]
# 3) only 'gollum' can change the file below;
# 'gollum' and anyone else can still change any other file.
/misty/mountains/cave/ring = !gollum
amend
provide the amend command (EXPERIMENTAL)
This extension provides an amend command that is similar to commit
--amend but does not prompt an editor.
Commands
Change creation
amend
amend the working copy parent with all or specified outstanding
changes:
hg amend [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Similar to hg commit --amend, but reuse the commit message without in-
voking editor, unless --edit was set.
See hg help commit for more details.
Options:
-A, --addremove
mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-i, --interactive
use interactive mode
--close-branch
mark a branch as closed, hiding it from the branch list
-s, --secret
use the secret phase for committing
-n,--note <VALUE>
store a note on the amend
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
-D, --currentdate
record the current date as commit date
-U, --currentuser
record the current user as committer
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
automv
check for unrecorded moves at commit time (EXPERIMENTAL)
This extension checks at commit/amend time if any of the committed
files comes from an unrecorded mv.
The threshold at which a file is considered a move can be set with the
automv.similarity config option. This option takes a percentage between
0 (disabled) and 100 (files must be identical), the default is 95.
beautifygraph
beautify log -G output by using Unicode characters (EXPERIMENTAL)
A terminal with UTF-8 support and monospace narrow text are re-
quired.
blackbox
log repository events to a blackbox for debugging
Logs event information to .hg/blackbox.log to help debug and diagnose
problems. The events that get logged can be configured via the black-
box.track and blackbox.ignore config keys.
Examples:
[blackbox]
track = *
ignore = pythonhook
# dirty is *EXPENSIVE* (slow);
# each log entry indicates `+` if the repository is dirty, like :hg:`id`.
dirty = True
# record the source of log messages
logsource = True
[blackbox]
track = command, commandfinish, commandexception, exthook, pythonhook
[blackbox]
track = incoming
[blackbox]
# limit the size of a log file
maxsize = 1.5 MB
# rotate up to N log files when the current one gets too big
maxfiles = 3
[blackbox]
# Include microseconds in log entries with %f (see Python function
# datetime.datetime.strftime)
date-format = %Y-%m-%d @ %H:%M:%S.%f
Commands
Repository maintenance
blackbox
view the recent repository events:
hg blackbox [OPTION]...
view the recent repository events
Options:
-l,--limit <VALUE>
the number of events to show (default: 10)
bookflow
implements bookmark-based branching (EXPERIMENTAL)
• Disables creation of new branches (config: enable_branches=False).
• Requires an active bookmark on commit (config: require_book-
mark=True).
• Doesn't move the active bookmark on update, only on commit.
• Requires '--rev' for moving an existing bookmark.
• Protects special bookmarks (config: protect=@).
flow related commands
hg book NAME
create a new bookmark
hg book NAME -r REV
move bookmark to revision (fast-forward)
hg up|co NAME
switch to bookmark
hg push -B .
push active bookmark
bugzilla
hooks for integrating with the Bugzilla bug tracker
This hook extension adds comments on bugs in Bugzilla when changesets
that refer to bugs by Bugzilla ID are seen. The comment is formatted
using the Mercurial template mechanism.
The bug references can optionally include an update for Bugzilla of the
hours spent working on the bug. Bugs can also be marked fixed.
Four basic modes of access to Bugzilla are provided:
1. Access via the Bugzilla REST-API. Requires bugzilla 5.0 or later.
2. Access via the Bugzilla XMLRPC interface. Requires Bugzilla 3.4 or
later.
3. Check data via the Bugzilla XMLRPC interface and submit bug change
via email to Bugzilla email interface. Requires Bugzilla 3.4 or
later.
4. Writing directly to the Bugzilla database. Only Bugzilla installa-
tions using MySQL are supported. Requires Python MySQLdb.
Writing directly to the database is susceptible to schema changes, and
relies on a Bugzilla contrib script to send out bug change notification
emails. This script runs as the user running Mercurial, must be run on
the host with the Bugzilla install, and requires permission to read
Bugzilla configuration details and the necessary MySQL user and pass-
word to have full access rights to the Bugzilla database. For these
reasons this access mode is now considered deprecated, and will not be
updated for new Bugzilla versions going forward. Only adding comments
is supported in this access mode.
Access via XMLRPC needs a Bugzilla username and password to be speci-
fied in the configuration. Comments are added under that username.
Since the configuration must be readable by all Mercurial users, it is
recommended that the rights of that user are restricted in Bugzilla to
the minimum necessary to add comments. Marking bugs fixed requires
Bugzilla 4.0 and later.
Access via XMLRPC/email uses XMLRPC to query Bugzilla, but sends email
to the Bugzilla email interface to submit comments to bugs. The From:
address in the email is set to the email address of the Mercurial user,
so the comment appears to come from the Mercurial user. In the event
that the Mercurial user email is not recognized by Bugzilla as a
Bugzilla user, the email associated with the Bugzilla username used to
log into Bugzilla is used instead as the source of the comment. Marking
bugs fixed works on all supported Bugzilla versions.
Access via the REST-API needs either a Bugzilla username and password
or an apikey specified in the configuration. Comments are made under
the given username or the user associated with the apikey in Bugzilla.
Configuration items common to all access modes:
bugzilla.version
The access type to use. Values recognized are:
restapi
Bugzilla REST-API, Bugzilla 5.0 and later.
xmlrpc
Bugzilla XMLRPC interface.
xmlrpc+email
Bugzilla XMLRPC and email interfaces.
3.0
MySQL access, Bugzilla 3.0 and later.
2.18
MySQL access, Bugzilla 2.18 and up to but not including
3.0.
2.16
MySQL access, Bugzilla 2.16 and up to but not including
2.18.
bugzilla.regexp
Regular expression to match bug IDs for update in changeset com-
mit message. It must contain one "()" named group <ids> con-
taining the bug IDs separated by non-digit characters. It may
also contain a named group <hours> with a floating-point number
giving the hours worked on the bug. If no named groups are
present, the first "()" group is assumed to contain the bug IDs,
and work time is not updated. The default expression matches Bug
1234, Bug no. 1234, Bug number 1234, Bugs 1234,5678, Bug 1234
and 5678 and variations thereof, followed by an hours number
prefixed by h or hours, e.g. hours 1.5. Matching is case insen-
sitive.
bugzilla.fixregexp
Regular expression to match bug IDs for marking fixed in change-
set commit message. This must contain a "()" named group <ids>`
containing the bug IDs separated by non-digit characters. It may
also contain a named group ``<hours> with a floating-point num-
ber giving the hours worked on the bug. If no named groups are
present, the first "()" group is assumed to contain the bug IDs,
and work time is not updated. The default expression matches
Fixes 1234, Fixes bug 1234, Fixes bugs 1234,5678, Fixes 1234 and
5678 and variations thereof, followed by an hours number pre-
fixed by h or hours, e.g. hours 1.5. Matching is case insensi-
tive.
bugzilla.fixstatus
The status to set a bug to when marking fixed. Default RESOLVED.
bugzilla.fixresolution
The resolution to set a bug to when marking fixed. Default
FIXED.
bugzilla.style
The style file to use when formatting comments.
bugzilla.template
Template to use when formatting comments. Overrides style if
specified. In addition to the usual Mercurial keywords, the ex-
tension specifies:
{bug}
The Bugzilla bug ID.
{root}
The full pathname of the Mercurial repository.
{webroot}
Stripped pathname of the Mercurial repository.
{hgweb}
Base URL for browsing Mercurial repositories.
Default changeset {node|short} in repo {root} refers to bug
{bug}.\ndetails:\n\t{desc|tabindent}
bugzilla.strip
The number of path separator characters to strip from the front
of the Mercurial repository path ({root} in templates) to pro-
duce {webroot}. For example, a repository with {root} /var/lo-
cal/my-project with a strip of 2 gives a value for {webroot} of
my-project. Default 0.
web.baseurl
Base URL for browsing Mercurial repositories. Referenced from
templates as {hgweb}.
Configuration items common to XMLRPC+email and MySQL access modes:
bugzilla.usermap
Path of file containing Mercurial committer email to Bugzilla
user email mappings. If specified, the file should contain one
mapping per line:
committer = Bugzilla user
See also the [usermap] section.
The [usermap] section is used to specify mappings of Mercurial commit-
ter email to Bugzilla user email. See also bugzilla.usermap. Contains
entries of the form committer = Bugzilla user.
XMLRPC and REST-API access mode configuration:
bugzilla.bzurl
The base URL for the Bugzilla installation. Default http://lo-
calhost/bugzilla.
bugzilla.user
The username to use to log into Bugzilla via XMLRPC. Default
bugs.
bugzilla.password
The password for Bugzilla login.
REST-API access mode uses the options listed above as well as:
bugzilla.apikey
An apikey generated on the Bugzilla instance for api access.
Using an apikey removes the need to store the user and password
options.
XMLRPC+email access mode uses the XMLRPC access mode configuration
items, and also:
bugzilla.bzemail
The Bugzilla email address.
In addition, the Mercurial email settings must be configured. See the
documentation in hgrc(5), sections [email] and [smtp].
MySQL access mode configuration:
bugzilla.host
Hostname of the MySQL server holding the Bugzilla database. De-
fault localhost.
bugzilla.db
Name of the Bugzilla database in MySQL. Default bugs.
bugzilla.user
Username to use to access MySQL server. Default bugs.
bugzilla.password
Password to use to access MySQL server.
bugzilla.timeout
Database connection timeout (seconds). Default 5.
bugzilla.bzuser
Fallback Bugzilla user name to record comments with, if change-
set committer cannot be found as a Bugzilla user.
bugzilla.bzdir
Bugzilla install directory. Used by default notify. Default
/var/www/html/bugzilla.
bugzilla.notify
The command to run to get Bugzilla to send bug change notifica-
tion emails. Substitutes from a map with 3 keys, bzdir, id (bug
id) and user (committer bugzilla email). Default depends on ver-
sion; from 2.18 it is "cd %(bzdir)s && perl -T contrib/sendbug-
mail.pl %(id)s %(user)s".
Activating the extension:
[extensions]
bugzilla =
[hooks]
# run bugzilla hook on every change pulled or pushed in here
incoming.bugzilla = python:hgext.bugzilla.hook
Example configurations:
XMLRPC example configuration. This uses the Bugzilla at
http://my-project.org/bugzilla, logging in as user bug-
mail@my-project.org with password plugh. It is used with a collection
of Mercurial repositories in /var/local/hg/repos/, with a web interface
at http://my-project.org/hg.
[bugzilla]
bzurl=http://my-project.org/bugzilla
user=bugmail@my-project.org
password=plugh
version=xmlrpc
template=Changeset {node|short} in {root|basename}.
{hgweb}/{webroot}/rev/{node|short}\n
{desc}\n
strip=5
[web]
baseurl=http://my-project.org/hg
XMLRPC+email example configuration. This uses the Bugzilla at
http://my-project.org/bugzilla, logging in as user bug-
mail@my-project.org with password plugh. It is used with a collection
of Mercurial repositories in /var/local/hg/repos/, with a web interface
at http://my-project.org/hg. Bug comments are sent to the Bugzilla
email address bugzilla@my-project.org.
[bugzilla]
bzurl=http://my-project.org/bugzilla
user=bugmail@my-project.org
password=plugh
version=xmlrpc+email
bzemail=bugzilla@my-project.org
template=Changeset {node|short} in {root|basename}.
{hgweb}/{webroot}/rev/{node|short}\n
{desc}\n
strip=5
[web]
baseurl=http://my-project.org/hg
[usermap]
user@emaildomain.com=user.name@bugzilladomain.com
MySQL example configuration. This has a local Bugzilla 3.2 installation
in /opt/bugzilla-3.2. The MySQL database is on localhost, the Bugzilla
database name is bugs and MySQL is accessed with MySQL username bugs
password XYZZY. It is used with a collection of Mercurial repositories
in /var/local/hg/repos/, with a web interface at
http://my-project.org/hg.
[bugzilla]
host=localhost
password=XYZZY
version=3.0
bzuser=unknown@domain.com
bzdir=/opt/bugzilla-3.2
template=Changeset {node|short} in {root|basename}.
{hgweb}/{webroot}/rev/{node|short}\n
{desc}\n
strip=5
[web]
baseurl=http://my-project.org/hg
[usermap]
user@emaildomain.com=user.name@bugzilladomain.com
All the above add a comment to the Bugzilla bug record of the form:
Changeset 3b16791d6642 in repository-name.
http://my-project.org/hg/repository-name/rev/3b16791d6642
Changeset commit comment. Bug 1234.
censor
erase file content at a given revision
The censor command instructs Mercurial to erase all content of a file
at a given revision without updating the changeset hash. This allows
existing history to remain valid while preventing future clones/pulls
from receiving the erased data.
Typical uses for censor are due to security or legal requirements, in-
cluding:
* Passwords, private keys, cryptographic material
* Licensed data/code/libraries for which the license has expired
* Personally Identifiable Information or other private data
Censored nodes can interrupt mercurial's typical operation whenever the
excised data needs to be materialized. Some commands, like hg cat/hg
revert, simply fail when asked to produce censored data. Others, like
hg verify and hg update, must be capable of tolerating censored data to
continue to function in a meaningful way. Such commands only tolerate
censored file revisions if they are allowed by the "censor.policy=ig-
nore" config option.
A few informative commands such as hg grep will unconditionally ignore
censored data and merely report that it was encountered.
Commands
Repository maintenance
censor
hg censor -r REV [-t TEXT] [FILE]
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
censor file from specified revision
-t,--tombstone <TEXT>
replacement tombstone data
children
command to display child changesets (DEPRECATED)
This extension is deprecated. You should use hg log -r "children(REV)"
instead.
Commands
Change navigation
children
show the children of the given or working directory revision:
hg children [-r REV] [FILE]
Print the children of the working directory's revisions. If a revision
is given via -r/--rev, the children of that revision will be printed.
If a file argument is given, revision in which the file was last
changed (after the working directory revision or the argument to --rev
if given) is printed.
Please use hg log instead:
hg children => hg log -r "children(.)"
hg children -r REV => hg log -r "children(REV)"
See hg help log and hg help revsets.children.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
show children of the specified revision (default: .)
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
churn
command to display statistics about repository history
Commands
Repository maintenance
churn
histogram of changes to the repository:
hg churn [-d DATE] [-r REV] [--aliases FILE] [FILE]
This command will display a histogram representing the number of
changed lines or revisions, grouped according to the given template.
The default template will group changes by author. The --dateformat
option may be used to group the results by date instead.
Statistics are based on the number of changed lines, or alternatively
the number of matching revisions if the --changesets option is speci-
fied.
Examples:
# display count of changed lines for every committer
hg churn -T "{author|email}"
# display daily activity graph
hg churn -f "%H" -s -c
# display activity of developers by month
hg churn -f "%Y-%m" -s -c
# display count of lines changed in every year
hg churn -f "%Y" -s
# display count of lines changed in a time range
hg churn -d "2020-04 to 2020-09"
It is possible to map alternate email addresses to a main address by
providing a file using the following format:
<alias email> = <actual email>
Such a file may be specified with the --aliases option, otherwise a
.hgchurn file will be looked for in the working directory root.
Aliases will be split from the rightmost "=".
Options:
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
count rate for the specified revision or revset
-d,--date <DATE>
count rate for revisions matching date spec
-t,--oldtemplate <TEMPLATE>
template to group changesets (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
template to group changesets (default: {author|email})
-f,--dateformat <FORMAT>
strftime-compatible format for grouping by date
-c, --changesets
count rate by number of changesets
-s, --sort
sort by key (default: sort by count)
--diffstat
display added/removed lines separately
--aliases <FILE>
file with email aliases
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
clonebundles
advertise pre-generated bundles to seed clones
"clonebundles" is a server-side extension used to advertise the exis-
tence of pre-generated, externally hosted bundle files to clients that
are cloning so that cloning can be faster, more reliable, and require
less resources on the server. "pullbundles" is a related feature for
sending pre-generated bundle files to clients as part of pull opera-
tions.
Cloning can be a CPU and I/O intensive operation on servers. Tradition-
ally, the server, in response to a client's request to clone, dynami-
cally generates a bundle containing the entire repository content and
sends it to the client. There is no caching on the server and the
server will have to redundantly generate the same outgoing bundle in
response to each clone request. For servers with large repositories or
with high clone volume, the load from clones can make scaling the
server challenging and costly.
This extension provides server operators the ability to offload poten-
tially expensive clone load to an external service. Pre-generated bun-
dles also allow using more CPU intensive compression, reducing the ef-
fective bandwidth requirements.
Here's how clone bundles work:
1. A server operator establishes a mechanism for making bundle files
available on a hosting service where Mercurial clients can fetch
them.
2. A manifest file listing available bundle URLs and some optional
metadata is added to the Mercurial repository on the server.
3. A client initiates a clone against a clone bundles aware server.
4. The client sees the server is advertising clone bundles and fetches
the manifest listing available bundles.
5. The client filters and sorts the available bundles based on what it
supports and prefers.
6. The client downloads and applies an available bundle from the
server-specified URL.
7. The client reconnects to the original server and performs the equiv-
alent of hg pull to retrieve all repository data not in the bundle.
(The repository could have been updated between when the bundle was
created and when the client started the clone.) This may use "pull-
bundles".
Instead of the server generating full repository bundles for every
clone request, it generates full bundles once and they are subsequently
reused to bootstrap new clones. The server may still transfer data at
clone time. However, this is only data that has been added/changed
since the bundle was created. For large, established repositories, this
can reduce server load for clones to less than 1% of original.
Here's how pullbundles work:
1. A manifest file listing available bundles and describing the revi-
sions is added to the Mercurial repository on the server.
2. A new-enough client informs the server that it supports partial
pulls and initiates a pull.
3. If the server has pull bundles enabled and sees the client advertis-
ing partial pulls, it checks for a matching pull bundle in the mani-
fest. A bundle matches if the format is supported by the client,
the client has the required revisions already and needs something
from the bundle.
4. If there is at least one matching bundle, the server sends it to the
client.
5. The client applies the bundle and notices that the server reply was
incomplete. It initiates another pull.
To work, this extension requires the following of server operators:
• Generating bundle files of repository content (typically periodi-
cally, such as once per day).
• Clone bundles: A file server that clients have network access to and
that Python knows how to talk to through its normal URL handling fa-
cility (typically an HTTP/HTTPS server).
• A process for keeping the bundles manifest in sync with available
bundle files.
Strictly speaking, using a static file hosting server isn't required: a
server operator could use a dynamic service for retrieving bundle data.
However, static file hosting services are simple and scalable and
should be sufficient for most needs.
Bundle files can be generated with the hg bundle command. Typically hg
bundle --all is used to produce a bundle of the entire repository.
hg debugcreatestreamclonebundle can be used to produce a special
streaming clonebundle. These are bundle files that are extremely effi-
cient to produce and consume (read: fast). However, they are larger
than traditional bundle formats and require that clients support the
exact set of repository data store formats in use by the repository
that created them. Typically, a newer server can serve data that is
compatible with older clients. However, streaming clone bundles don't
have this guarantee. Server operators need to be aware that newer ver-
sions of Mercurial may produce streaming clone bundles incompatible
with older Mercurial versions.
A server operator is responsible for creating a .hg/clonebundles.mani-
fest file containing the list of available bundle files suitable for
seeding clones. If this file does not exist, the repository will not
advertise the existence of clone bundles when clients connect. For pull
bundles, .hg/pullbundles.manifest is used.
The manifest file contains a newline (n) delimited list of entries.
Each line in this file defines an available bundle. Lines have the for-
mat:
<URL> [<key>=<value>[ <key>=<value>]]
That is, a URL followed by an optional, space-delimited list of
key=value pairs describing additional properties of this bundle. Both
keys and values are URI encoded.
For pull bundles, the URL is a path under the .hg directory of the
repository.
Keys in UPPERCASE are reserved for use by Mercurial and are defined be-
low. All non-uppercase keys can be used by site installations. An ex-
ample use for custom properties is to use the datacenter attribute to
define which data center a file is hosted in. Clients could then prefer
a server in the data center closest to them.
The following reserved keys are currently defined:
BUNDLESPEC
A "bundle specification" string that describes the type of the
bundle.
These are string values that are accepted by the "--type" argu-
ment of hg bundle.
The values are parsed in strict mode, which means they must be
of the "<compression>-<type>" form. See mercurial.ex-
change.parsebundlespec() for more details.
hg debugbundle --spec can be used to print the bundle specifica-
tion string for a bundle file. The output of this command can be
used verbatim for the value of BUNDLESPEC (it is already es-
caped).
Clients will automatically filter out specifications that are
unknown or unsupported so they won't attempt to download some-
thing that likely won't apply.
The actual value doesn't impact client behavior beyond filter-
ing: clients will still sniff the bundle type from the header of
downloaded files.
Use of this key is highly recommended, as it allows clients to
easily skip unsupported bundles. If this key is not defined, an
old client may attempt to apply a bundle that it is incapable of
reading.
REQUIRESNI
Whether Server Name Indication (SNI) is required to connect to
the URL. SNI allows servers to use multiple certificates on the
same IP. It is somewhat common in CDNs and other hosting
providers. Older Python versions do not support SNI. Defining
this attribute enables clients with older Python versions to
filter this entry without experiencing an opaque SSL failure at
connection time.
If this is defined, it is important to advertise a non-SNI fall-
back URL or clients running old Python releases may not be able
to clone with the clonebundles facility.
Value should be "true".
REQUIREDRAM
Value specifies expected memory requirements to decode the pay-
load. Values can have suffixes for common bytes sizes. e.g.
"64MB".
This key is often used with zstd-compressed bundles using a high
compression level / window size, which can require 100+ MB of
memory to decode.
heads Used for pull bundles. This contains the ; separated changeset
hashes of the heads of the bundle content.
bases Used for pull bundles. This contains the ; separated changeset
hashes of the roots of the bundle content. This can be skipped
if the bundle was created without --base.
Manifests can contain multiple entries. Assuming metadata is defined,
clients will filter entries from the manifest that they don't support.
The remaining entries are optionally sorted by client preferences
(ui.clonebundleprefers config option). The client then attempts to
fetch the bundle at the first URL in the remaining list.
Errors when downloading a bundle will fail the entire clone operation:
clients do not automatically fall back to a traditional clone. The rea-
son for this is that if a server is using clone bundles, it is probably
doing so because the feature is necessary to help it scale. In other
words, there is an assumption that clone load will be offloaded to an-
other service and that the Mercurial server isn't responsible for serv-
ing this clone load. If that other service experiences issues and
clients start mass falling back to the original Mercurial server, the
added clone load could overwhelm the server due to unexpected load and
effectively take it offline. Not having clients automatically fall back
to cloning from the original server mitigates this scenario.
Because there is no automatic Mercurial server fallback on failure of
the bundle hosting service, it is important for server operators to
view the bundle hosting service as an extension of the Mercurial server
in terms of availability and service level agreements: if the bundle
hosting service goes down, so does the ability for clients to clone.
Note: clients will see a message informing them how to bypass the clone
bundles facility when a failure occurs. So server operators should pre-
pare for some people to follow these instructions when a failure oc-
curs, thus driving more load to the original Mercurial server when the
bundle hosting service fails.
closehead
close arbitrary heads without checking them out first
Commands
Change manipulation
close-head
close the given head revisions:
hg close-head [OPTION]... [REV]...
This is equivalent to checking out each revision in a clean tree and
running hg commit --close-branch, except that it doesn't change the
working directory.
The commit message must be specified with -l or -m.
Options:
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
revision to check
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: close-heads
commitextras
adds a new flag extras to commit (ADVANCED)
convert
import revisions from foreign VCS repositories into Mercurial
Commands
Uncategorized commands
convert
convert a foreign SCM repository to a Mercurial one.:
hg convert [OPTION]... SOURCE [DEST [REVMAP]]
Accepted source formats [identifiers]:
• Mercurial [hg]
• CVS [cvs]
• Darcs [darcs]
• git [git]
• Subversion [svn]
• Monotone [mtn]
• GNU Arch [gnuarch]
• Bazaar [bzr]
• Perforce [p4]
Accepted destination formats [identifiers]:
• Mercurial [hg]
• Subversion [svn] (history on branches is not preserved)
If no revision is given, all revisions will be converted. Otherwise,
convert will only import up to the named revision (given in a format
understood by the source).
If no destination directory name is specified, it defaults to the base-
name of the source with -hg appended. If the destination repository
doesn't exist, it will be created.
By default, all sources except Mercurial will use --branchsort. Mercu-
rial uses --sourcesort to preserve original revision numbers order.
Sort modes have the following effects:
--branchsort
convert from parent to child revision when possible, which means
branches are usually converted one after the other. It generates
more compact repositories.
--datesort
sort revisions by date. Converted repositories have good-looking
changelogs but are often an order of magnitude larger than the
same ones generated by --branchsort.
--sourcesort
try to preserve source revisions order, only supported by Mercu-
rial sources.
--closesort
try to move closed revisions as close as possible to parent
branches, only supported by Mercurial sources.
If REVMAP isn't given, it will be put in a default location
(<dest>/.hg/shamap by default). The REVMAP is a simple text file that
maps each source commit ID to the destination ID for that revision,
like so:
<source ID> <destination ID>
If the file doesn't exist, it's automatically created. It's updated on
each commit copied, so hg convert can be interrupted and can be run re-
peatedly to copy new commits.
The authormap is a simple text file that maps each source commit author
to a destination commit author. It is handy for source SCMs that use
unix logins to identify authors (e.g.: CVS). One line per author map-
ping and the line format is:
source author = destination author
Empty lines and lines starting with a # are ignored.
The filemap is a file that allows filtering and remapping of files and
directories. Each line can contain one of the following directives:
include path/to/file-or-dir
exclude path/to/file-or-dir
rename path/to/source path/to/destination
Comment lines start with #. A specified path matches if it equals the
full relative name of a file or one of its parent directories. The in-
clude or exclude directive with the longest matching path applies, so
line order does not matter.
The include directive causes a file, or all files under a directory, to
be included in the destination repository. The default if there are no
include statements is to include everything. If there are any include
statements, nothing else is included. The exclude directive causes
files or directories to be omitted. The rename directive renames a file
or directory if it is converted. To rename from a subdirectory into the
root of the repository, use . as the path to rename to.
--full will make sure the converted changesets contain exactly the
right files with the right content. It will make a full conversion of
all files, not just the ones that have changed. Files that already are
correct will not be changed. This can be used to apply filemap changes
when converting incrementally. This is currently only supported for
Mercurial and Subversion.
The splicemap is a file that allows insertion of synthetic history,
letting you specify the parents of a revision. This is useful if you
want to e.g. give a Subversion merge two parents, or graft two discon-
nected series of history together. Each entry contains a key, followed
by a space, followed by one or two comma-separated values:
key parent1, parent2
The key is the revision ID in the source revision control system whose
parents should be modified (same format as a key in .hg/shamap). The
values are the revision IDs (in either the source or destination revi-
sion control system) that should be used as the new parents for that
node. For example, if you have merged "release-1.0" into "trunk", then
you should specify the revision on "trunk" as the first parent and the
one on the "release-1.0" branch as the second.
The branchmap is a file that allows you to rename a branch when it is
being brought in from whatever external repository. When used in con-
junction with a splicemap, it allows for a powerful combination to help
fix even the most badly mismanaged repositories and turn them into
nicely structured Mercurial repositories. The branchmap contains lines
of the form:
original_branch_name new_branch_name
where "original_branch_name" is the name of the branch in the source
repository, and "new_branch_name" is the name of the branch is the des-
tination repository. No whitespace is allowed in the new branch name.
This can be used to (for instance) move code in one repository from
"default" to a named branch.
Mercurial Source
The Mercurial source recognizes the following configuration options,
which you can set on the command line with --config:
convert.hg.ignoreerrors
ignore integrity errors when reading. Use it to fix Mercurial
repositories with missing revlogs, by converting from and to
Mercurial. Default is False.
convert.hg.saverev
store original revision ID in changeset (forces target IDs to
change). It takes a boolean argument and defaults to False.
convert.hg.startrev
specify the initial Mercurial revision. The default is 0.
convert.hg.revs
revset specifying the source revisions to convert.
Bazaar Source
The following options can be used with --config:
convert.bzr.saverev
whether to store the original Bazaar commit ID in the metadata
of the destination commit. The default is True.
CVS Source
CVS source will use a sandbox (i.e. a checked-out copy) from CVS to in-
dicate the starting point of what will be converted. Direct access to
the repository files is not needed, unless of course the repository is
:local:. The conversion uses the top level directory in the sandbox to
find the CVS repository, and then uses CVS rlog commands to find files
to convert. This means that unless a filemap is given, all files under
the starting directory will be converted, and that any directory reor-
ganization in the CVS sandbox is ignored.
The following options can be used with --config:
convert.cvsps.cache
Set to False to disable remote log caching, for testing and de-
bugging purposes. Default is True.
convert.cvsps.fuzz
Specify the maximum time (in seconds) that is allowed between
commits with identical user and log message in a single change-
set. When very large files were checked in as part of a change-
set then the default may not be long enough. The default is 60.
convert.cvsps.logencoding
Specify encoding name to be used for transcoding CVS log mes-
sages. Multiple encoding names can be specified as a list (see
hg help config.Syntax), but only the first acceptable encoding
in the list is used per CVS log entries. This transcoding is ex-
ecuted before cvslog hook below.
convert.cvsps.mergeto
Specify a regular expression to which commit log messages are
matched. If a match occurs, then the conversion process will in-
sert a dummy revision merging the branch on which this log mes-
sage occurs to the branch indicated in the regex. Default is
{{mergetobranch ([-\w]+)}}
convert.cvsps.mergefrom
Specify a regular expression to which commit log messages are
matched. If a match occurs, then the conversion process will add
the most recent revision on the branch indicated in the regex as
the second parent of the changeset. Default is {{mergefrombranch
([-\w]+)}}
convert.localtimezone
use local time (as determined by the TZ environment variable)
for changeset date/times. The default is False (use UTC).
hooks.cvslog
Specify a Python function to be called at the end of gathering
the CVS log. The function is passed a list with the log entries,
and can modify the entries in-place, or add or delete them.
hooks.cvschangesets
Specify a Python function to be called after the changesets are
calculated from the CVS log. The function is passed a list with
the changeset entries, and can modify the changesets in-place,
or add or delete them.
An additional "debugcvsps" Mercurial command allows the builtin change-
set merging code to be run without doing a conversion. Its parameters
and output are similar to that of cvsps 2.1. Please see the command
help for more details.
Subversion Source
Subversion source detects classical trunk/branches/tags layouts. By
default, the supplied svn://repo/path/ source URL is converted as a
single branch. If svn://repo/path/trunk exists it replaces the default
branch. If svn://repo/path/branches exists, its subdirectories are
listed as possible branches. If svn://repo/path/tags exists, it is
looked for tags referencing converted branches. Default trunk, branches
and tags values can be overridden with following options. Set them to
paths relative to the source URL, or leave them blank to disable auto
detection.
The following options can be set with --config:
convert.svn.branches
specify the directory containing branches. The default is
branches.
convert.svn.tags
specify the directory containing tags. The default is tags.
convert.svn.trunk
specify the name of the trunk branch. The default is trunk.
convert.localtimezone
use local time (as determined by the TZ environment variable)
for changeset date/times. The default is False (use UTC).
Source history can be retrieved starting at a specific revision, in-
stead of being integrally converted. Only single branch conversions are
supported.
convert.svn.startrev
specify start Subversion revision number. The default is 0.
Git Source
The Git importer converts commits from all reachable branches (refs in
refs/heads) and remotes (refs in refs/remotes) to Mercurial. Branches
are converted to bookmarks with the same name, with the leading
'refs/heads' stripped. Git submodules are converted to Git subrepos in
Mercurial.
The following options can be set with --config:
convert.git.similarity
specify how similar files modified in a commit must be to be im-
ported as renames or copies, as a percentage between 0 (dis-
abled) and 100 (files must be identical). For example, 90 means
that a delete/add pair will be imported as a rename if more than
90% of the file hasn't changed. The default is 50.
convert.git.findcopiesharder
while detecting copies, look at all files in the working copy
instead of just changed ones. This is very expensive for large
projects, and is only effective when convert.git.similarity is
greater than 0. The default is False.
convert.git.renamelimit
perform rename and copy detection up to this many changed files
in a commit. Increasing this will make rename and copy detection
more accurate but will significantly slow down computation on
large projects. The option is only relevant if convert.git.simi-
larity is greater than 0. The default is 400.
convert.git.committeractions
list of actions to take when processing author and committer
values.
Git commits have separate author (who wrote the commit) and com-
mitter (who applied the commit) fields. Not all destinations
support separate author and committer fields (including Mercu-
rial). This config option controls what to do with these author
and committer fields during conversion.
A value of messagedifferent will append a committer: ... line
to the commit message if the Git committer is different from the
author. The prefix of that line can be specified using the syn-
tax messagedifferent=<prefix>. e.g. messagedifferent=git-commit-
ter:. When a prefix is specified, a space will always be in-
serted between the prefix and the value.
messagealways behaves like messagedifferent except it will al-
ways result in a committer: ... line being appended to the com-
mit message. This value is mutually exclusive with messagedif-
ferent.
dropcommitter will remove references to the committer. Only ref-
erences to the author will remain. Actions that add references
to the committer will have no effect when this is set.
replaceauthor will replace the value of the author field with
the committer. Other actions that add references to the commit-
ter will still take effect when this is set.
The default is messagedifferent.
convert.git.extrakeys
list of extra keys from commit metadata to copy to the destina-
tion. Some Git repositories store extra metadata in commits. By
default, this non-default metadata will be lost during conver-
sion. Setting this config option can retain that metadata. Some
built-in keys such as parent and branch are not allowed to be
copied.
convert.git.remoteprefix
remote refs are converted as bookmarks with convert.git.re-
moteprefix as a prefix followed by a /. The default is 'remote'.
convert.git.saverev
whether to store the original Git commit ID in the metadata of
the destination commit. The default is True.
convert.git.skipsubmodules
does not convert root level .gitmodules files or files with
160000 mode indicating a submodule. Default is False.
Perforce Source
The Perforce (P4) importer can be given a p4 depot path or a client
specification as source. It will convert all files in the source to a
flat Mercurial repository, ignoring labels, branches and integrations.
Note that when a depot path is given you then usually should specify a
target directory, because otherwise the target may be named ...-hg.
The following options can be set with --config:
convert.p4.encoding
specify the encoding to use when decoding standard output of the
Perforce command line tool. The default is default system encod-
ing.
convert.p4.startrev
specify initial Perforce revision (a Perforce changelist num-
ber).
Mercurial Destination
The Mercurial destination will recognize Mercurial subrepositories in
the destination directory, and update the .hgsubstate file automati-
cally if the destination subrepositories contain the
<dest>/<sub>/.hg/shamap file. Converting a repository with subreposi-
tories requires converting a single repository at a time, from the bot-
tom up.
An example showing how to convert a repository with subrepositories:
# so convert knows the type when it sees a non empty destination
$ hg init converted
$ hg convert orig/sub1 converted/sub1
$ hg convert orig/sub2 converted/sub2
$ hg convert orig converted
The following options are supported:
convert.hg.clonebranches
dispatch source branches in separate clones. The default is
False.
convert.hg.tagsbranch
branch name for tag revisions, defaults to default.
convert.hg.usebranchnames
preserve branch names. The default is True.
convert.hg.sourcename
records the given string as a 'convert_source' extra value on
each commit made in the target repository. The default is None.
convert.hg.preserve-hash
only works with mercurial sources. Make convert prevent perfor-
mance improvement to the list of modified files in commits when
such an improvement would cause the hash of a commit to change.
The default is False.
All Destinations
All destination types accept the following options:
convert.skiptags
does not convert tags from the source repo to the target repo.
The default is False.
Subversion Destination
Original commit dates are not preserved by default.
convert.svn.dangerous-set-commit-dates
preserve original commit dates, forcefully setting svn:date re-
vision properties. This option is DANGEROUS and may break some
subversion functionality for the resulting repository (e.g. fil-
tering revisions with date ranges in svn log), as original com-
mit dates are not guaranteed to be monotonically increasing.
For commit dates setting to work destination repository must have
pre-revprop-change hook configured to allow setting of svn:date revi-
sion properties. See Subversion documentation for more details.
Options:
--authors <FILE>
username mapping filename (DEPRECATED) (use --authormap instead)
-s,--source-type <TYPE>
source repository type
-d,--dest-type <TYPE>
destination repository type
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
import up to source revision REV
-A,--authormap <FILE>
remap usernames using this file
--filemap <FILE>
remap file names using contents of file
--full apply filemap changes by converting all files again
--splicemap <FILE>
splice synthesized history into place
--branchmap <FILE>
change branch names while converting
--branchsort
try to sort changesets by branches
--datesort
try to sort changesets by date
--sourcesort
preserve source changesets order
--closesort
try to reorder closed revisions
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
eol
automatically manage newlines in repository files
This extension allows you to manage the type of line endings (CRLF or
LF) that are used in the repository and in the local working directory.
That way you can get CRLF line endings on Windows and LF on Unix/Mac,
thereby letting everybody use their OS native line endings.
The extension reads its configuration from a versioned .hgeol configu-
ration file found in the root of the working directory. The .hgeol file
use the same syntax as all other Mercurial configuration files. It uses
two sections, [patterns] and [repository].
The [patterns] section specifies how line endings should be converted
between the working directory and the repository. The format is speci-
fied by a file pattern. The first match is used, so put more specific
patterns first. The available line endings are LF, CRLF, and BIN.
Files with the declared format of CRLF or LF are always checked out and
stored in the repository in that format and files declared to be binary
(BIN) are left unchanged. Additionally, native is an alias for checking
out in the platform's default line ending: LF on Unix (including Mac OS
X) and CRLF on Windows. Note that BIN (do nothing to line endings) is
Mercurial's default behavior; it is only needed if you need to override
a later, more general pattern.
The optional [repository] section specifies the line endings to use for
files stored in the repository. It has a single setting, native, which
determines the storage line endings for files declared as native in the
[patterns] section. It can be set to LF or CRLF. The default is LF. For
example, this means that on Windows, files configured as native (CRLF
by default) will be converted to LF when stored in the repository.
Files declared as LF, CRLF, or BIN in the [patterns] section are always
stored as-is in the repository.
Example versioned .hgeol file:
[patterns]
**.py = native
**.vcproj = CRLF
**.txt = native
Makefile = LF
**.jpg = BIN
[repository]
native = LF
Note The rules will first apply when files are touched in the working
directory, e.g. by updating to null and back to tip to touch all
files.
The extension uses an optional [eol] section read from both the normal
Mercurial configuration files and the .hgeol file, with the latter
overriding the former. You can use that section to control the overall
behavior. There are three settings:
• eol.native (default os.linesep) can be set to LF or CRLF to override
the default interpretation of native for checkout. This can be used
with hg archive on Unix, say, to generate an archive where files have
line endings for Windows.
• eol.only-consistent (default True) can be set to False to make the
extension convert files with inconsistent EOLs. Inconsistent means
that there is both CRLF and LF present in the file. Such files are
normally not touched under the assumption that they have mixed EOLs
on purpose.
• eol.fix-trailing-newline (default False) can be set to True to ensure
that converted files end with a EOL character (either \n or \r\n as
per the configured patterns).
The extension provides cleverencode: and cleverdecode: filters like the
deprecated win32text extension does. This means that you can disable
win32text and enable eol and your filters will still work. You only
need to these filters until you have prepared a .hgeol file.
The win32text.forbid* hooks provided by the win32text extension have
been unified into a single hook named eol.checkheadshook. The hook will
lookup the expected line endings from the .hgeol file, which means you
must migrate to a .hgeol file first before using the hook. eol.check-
headshook only checks heads, intermediate invalid revisions will be
pushed. To forbid them completely, use the eol.checkallhook hook. These
hooks are best used as pretxnchangegroup hooks.
See hg help patterns for more information about the glob patterns used.
extdiff
command to allow external programs to compare revisions
The extdiff Mercurial extension allows you to use external programs to
compare revisions, or revision with working directory. The external
diff programs are called with a configurable set of options and two
non-option arguments: paths to directories containing snapshots of
files to compare.
If there is more than one file being compared and the "child" revision
is the working directory, any modifications made in the external diff
program will be copied back to the working directory from the temporary
directory.
The extdiff extension also allows you to configure new diff commands,
so you do not need to type hg extdiff -p kdiff3 always.
[extdiff]
# add new command that runs GNU diff(1) in 'context diff' mode
cdiff = gdiff -Nprc5
## or the old way:
#cmd.cdiff = gdiff
#opts.cdiff = -Nprc5
# add new command called meld, runs meld (no need to name twice). If
# the meld executable is not available, the meld tool in [merge-tools]
# will be used, if available
meld =
# add new command called vimdiff, runs gvimdiff with DirDiff plugin
# (see http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=102) Non
# English user, be sure to put "let g:DirDiffDynamicDiffText = 1" in
# your .vimrc
vimdiff = gvim -f "+next" \
"+execute 'DirDiff' fnameescape(argv(0)) fnameescape(argv(1))"
Tool arguments can include variables that are expanded at runtime:
$parent1, $plabel1 - filename, descriptive label of first parent
$child, $clabel - filename, descriptive label of child revision
$parent2, $plabel2 - filename, descriptive label of second parent
$root - repository root
$parent is an alias for $parent1.
The extdiff extension will look in your [diff-tools] and [merge-tools]
sections for diff tool arguments, when none are specified in [extdiff].
[extdiff]
kdiff3 =
[diff-tools]
kdiff3.diffargs=--L1 '$plabel1' --L2 '$clabel' $parent $child
If a program has a graphical interface, it might be interesting to tell
Mercurial about it. It will prevent the program from being mistakenly
used in a terminal-only environment (such as an SSH terminal session),
and will make hg extdiff --per-file open multiple file diffs at once
instead of one by one (if you still want to open file diffs one by one,
you can use the --confirm option).
Declaring that a tool has a graphical interface can be done with the
gui flag next to where diffargs are specified:
[diff-tools]
kdiff3.diffargs=--L1 '$plabel1' --L2 '$clabel' $parent $child
kdiff3.gui = true
You can use -I/-X and list of file or directory names like normal hg
diff command. The extdiff extension makes snapshots of only needed
files, so running the external diff program will actually be pretty
fast (at least faster than having to compare the entire tree).
Commands
File content management
extdiff
use external program to diff repository (or selected files):
hg extdiff [OPT]... [FILE]...
Show differences between revisions for the specified files, using an
external program. The default program used is diff, with default op-
tions "-Npru".
To select a different program, use the -p/--program option. The program
will be passed the names of two directories to compare, unless the
--per-file option is specified (see below). To pass additional options
to the program, use -o/--option. These will be passed before the names
of the directories or files to compare.
The --from, --to, and --change options work the same way they do for hg
diff.
The --per-file option runs the external program repeatedly on each file
to diff, instead of once on two directories. By default, this happens
one by one, where the next file diff is open in the external program
only once the previous external program (for the previous file diff)
has exited. If the external program has a graphical interface, it can
open all the file diffs at once instead of one by one. See hg help -e
extdiff for information about how to tell Mercurial that a given pro-
gram has a graphical interface.
The --confirm option will prompt the user before each invocation of the
external program. It is ignored if --per-file isn't specified.
Options:
-p,--program <CMD>
comparison program to run
-o,--option <OPT[+]>
pass option to comparison program
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
revision (DEPRECATED)
--from <REV1>
revision to diff from
--to <REV2>
revision to diff to
-c,--change <REV>
change made by revision
--per-file
compare each file instead of revision snapshots
--confirm
prompt user before each external program invocation
--patch
compare patches for two revisions
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
factotum
http authentication with factotum
This extension allows the factotum(4) facility on Plan 9 from Bell Labs
platforms to provide authentication information for HTTP access. Con-
figuration entries specified in the auth section as well as authentica-
tion information provided in the repository URL are fully supported. If
no prefix is specified, a value of "*" will be assumed.
By default, keys are specified as:
proto=pass service=hg prefix=<prefix> user=<username> !password=<password>
If the factotum extension is unable to read the required key, one will
be requested interactively.
A configuration section is available to customize runtime behavior. By
default, these entries are:
[factotum]
executable = /bin/auth/factotum
mountpoint = /mnt/factotum
service = hg
The executable entry defines the full path to the factotum binary. The
mountpoint entry defines the path to the factotum file service. Lastly,
the service entry controls the service name used when reading keys.
fastannotate
yet another annotate implementation that might be faster (EXPERIMENTAL)
The fastannotate extension provides a 'fastannotate' command that makes
use of the linelog data structure as a cache layer and is expected to
be faster than the vanilla 'annotate' if the cache is present.
In most cases, fastannotate requires a setup that mainbranch is some
pointer that always moves forward, to be most efficient.
Using fastannotate together with linkrevcache would speed up building
the annotate cache greatly. Run "debugbuildlinkrevcache" before "debug-
buildannotatecache".
[fastannotate]
# specify the main branch head. the internal linelog will only contain
# the linear (ignoring p2) "mainbranch". since linelog cannot move
# backwards without a rebuild, this should be something that always moves
# forward, usually it is "master" or "@".
mainbranch = master
# fastannotate supports different modes to expose its feature.
# a list of combination:
# - fastannotate: expose the feature via the "fastannotate" command which
# deals with everything in a most efficient way, and provides extra
# features like --deleted etc.
# - fctx: replace fctx.annotate implementation. note:
# a. it is less efficient than the "fastannotate" command
# b. it will make it practically impossible to access the old (disk
# side-effect free) annotate implementation
# c. it implies "hgweb".
# - hgweb: replace hgweb's annotate implementation. conflict with "fctx".
# (default: fastannotate)
modes = fastannotate
# default format when no format flags are used (default: number)
defaultformat = changeset, user, date
# serve the annotate cache via wire protocol (default: False)
# tip: the .hg/fastannotate directory is portable - can be rsynced
server = True
# build annotate cache on demand for every client request (default: True)
# disabling it could make server response faster, useful when there is a
# cronjob building the cache.
serverbuildondemand = True
# update local annotate cache from remote on demand
client = False
# path to use when connecting to the remote server (default: default)
remotepath = default
# minimal length of the history of a file required to fetch linelog from
# the server. (default: 10)
clientfetchthreshold = 10
# for "fctx" mode, always follow renames regardless of command line option.
# this is a BC with the original command but will reduced the space needed
# for annotate cache, and is useful for client-server setup since the
# server will only provide annotate cache with default options (i.e. with
# follow). do not affect "fastannotate" mode. (default: True)
forcefollow = True
# for "fctx" mode, always treat file as text files, to skip the "isbinary"
# check. this is consistent with the "fastannotate" command and could help
# to avoid a file fetch if remotefilelog is used. (default: True)
forcetext = True
# use unfiltered repo for better performance.
unfilteredrepo = True
# sacrifice correctness in some corner cases for performance. it does not
# affect the correctness of the annotate cache being built. the option
# is experimental and may disappear in the future (default: False)
perfhack = True
Commands
Uncategorized commands
fastexport
export repositories as git fast-import stream
Commands
Change import/export
fastexport
export repository as git fast-import stream:
hg fastexport [OPTION]... [REV]...
This command lets you dump a repository as a human-readable text
stream. It can be piped into corresponding import routines like "git
fast-import". Incremental dumps can be created by using marks files.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
revisions to export
-i,--import-marks <FILE>
old marks file to read
-e,--export-marks <FILE>
new marks file to write
-A,--authormap <FILE>
remap usernames using this file
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
fetch
pull, update and merge in one command (DEPRECATED)
Commands
Remote repository management
fetch
pull changes from a remote repository, merge new changes if needed.:
hg fetch [SOURCE]
This finds all changes from the repository at the specified path or URL
and adds them to the local repository.
If the pulled changes add a new branch head, the head is automatically
merged, and the result of the merge is committed. Otherwise, the work-
ing directory is updated to include the new changes.
When a merge is needed, the working directory is first updated to the
newly pulled changes. Local changes are then merged into the pulled
changes. To switch the merge order, use --switch-parent.
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
a specific revision you would like to pull
--edit invoke editor on commit messages
--force-editor
edit commit message (DEPRECATED)
--switch-parent
switch parents when merging
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
fix
rewrite file content in changesets or working copy (EXPERIMENTAL)
Provides a command that runs configured tools on the contents of modi-
fied files, writing back any fixes to the working copy or replacing
changesets.
Here is an example configuration that causes hg fix to apply automatic
formatting fixes to modified lines in C++ code:
[fix]
clang-format:command=clang-format --assume-filename={rootpath}
clang-format:linerange=--lines={first}:{last}
clang-format:pattern=set:**.cpp or **.hpp
The :command suboption forms the first part of the shell command that
will be used to fix a file. The content of the file is passed on stan-
dard input, and the fixed file content is expected on standard output.
Any output on standard error will be displayed as a warning. If the
exit status is not zero, the file will not be affected. A placeholder
warning is displayed if there is a non-zero exit status but no standard
error output. Some values may be substituted into the command:
{rootpath} The path of the file being fixed, relative to the repo root
{basename} The name of the file being fixed, without the directory path
If the :linerange suboption is set, the tool will only be run if there
are changed lines in a file. The value of this suboption is appended to
the shell command once for every range of changed lines in the file.
Some values may be substituted into the command:
{first} The 1-based line number of the first line in the modified range
{last} The 1-based line number of the last line in the modified range
Deleted sections of a file will be ignored by :linerange, because there
is no corresponding line range in the version being fixed.
By default, tools that set :linerange will only be executed if there is
at least one changed line range. This is meant to prevent accidents
like running a code formatter in such a way that it unexpectedly refor-
mats the whole file. If such a tool needs to operate on unchanged
files, it should set the :skipclean suboption to false.
The :pattern suboption determines which files will be passed through
each configured tool. See hg help patterns for possible values. How-
ever, all patterns are relative to the repo root, even if that text
says they are relative to the current working directory. If there are
file arguments to hg fix, the intersection of these patterns is used.
There is also a configurable limit for the maximum size of file that
will be processed by hg fix:
[fix]
maxfilesize = 2MB
Normally, execution of configured tools will continue after a failure
(indicated by a non-zero exit status). It can also be configured to
abort after the first such failure, so that no files will be affected
if any tool fails. This abort will also cause hg fix to exit with a
non-zero status:
[fix]
failure = abort
When multiple tools are configured to affect a file, they execute in an
order defined by the :priority suboption. The priority suboption has a
default value of zero for each tool. Tools are executed in order of de-
scending priority. The execution order of tools with equal priority is
unspecified. For example, you could use the 'sort' and 'head' utilities
to keep only the 10 smallest numbers in a text file by ensuring that
'sort' runs before 'head':
[fix]
sort:command = sort -n
head:command = head -n 10
sort:pattern = numbers.txt
head:pattern = numbers.txt
sort:priority = 2
head:priority = 1
To account for changes made by each tool, the line numbers used for in-
cremental formatting are recomputed before executing the next tool. So,
each tool may see different values for the arguments added by the :lin-
erange suboption.
Each fixer tool is allowed to return some metadata in addition to the
fixed file content. The metadata must be placed before the file content
on stdout, separated from the file content by a zero byte. The metadata
is parsed as a JSON value (so, it should be UTF-8 encoded and contain
no zero bytes). A fixer tool is expected to produce this metadata en-
coding if and only if the :metadata suboption is true:
[fix]
tool:command = tool --prepend-json-metadata
tool:metadata = true
The metadata values are passed to hooks, which can be used to print
summaries or perform other post-fixing work. The supported hooks are:
"postfixfile"
Run once for each file in each revision where any fixer tools made changes
to the file content. Provides "$HG_REV" and "$HG_PATH" to identify the file,
and "$HG_METADATA" with a map of fixer names to metadata values from fixer
tools that affected the file. Fixer tools that didn't affect the file have a
value of None. Only fixer tools that executed are present in the metadata.
"postfix"
Run once after all files and revisions have been handled. Provides
"$HG_REPLACEMENTS" with information about what revisions were created and
made obsolete. Provides a boolean "$HG_WDIRWRITTEN" to indicate whether any
files in the working copy were updated. Provides a list "$HG_METADATA"
mapping fixer tool names to lists of metadata values returned from
executions that modified a file. This aggregates the same metadata
previously passed to the "postfixfile" hook.
Fixer tools are run in the repository's root directory. This allows
them to read configuration files from the working copy, or even write
to the working copy. The working copy is not updated to match the re-
vision being fixed. In fact, several revisions may be fixed in paral-
lel. Writes to the working copy are not amended into the revision being
fixed; fixer tools should always write fixed file content back to std-
out as documented above.
Commands
File content management
fix
rewrite file content in changesets or working directory:
hg fix [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Runs any configured tools to fix the content of files. Only affects
files with changes, unless file arguments are provided. Only affects
changed lines of files, unless the --whole flag is used. Some tools may
always affect the whole file regardless of --whole.
If --working-dir is used, files with uncommitted changes in the working
copy will be fixed. Note that no backup are made.
If revisions are specified with --source, those revisions and their de-
scendants will be checked, and they may be replaced with new revisions
that have fixed file content. By automatically including the descen-
dants, no merging, rebasing, or evolution will be required. If an an-
cestor of the working copy is included, then the working copy itself
will also be fixed, and the working copy will be updated to the fixed
parent.
When determining what lines of each file to fix at each revision, the
whole set of revisions being fixed is considered, so that fixes to ear-
lier revisions are not forgotten in later ones. The --base flag can be
used to override this default behavior, though it is not usually desir-
able to do so.
Options:
--all fix all non-public non-obsolete revisions
--base <REV[+]>
revisions to diff against (overrides automatic selection, and
applies to every revision being fixed)
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
revisions to fix (ADVANCED)
-s,--source <REV[+]>
fix the specified revisions and their descendants
-w, --working-dir
fix the working directory
--whole
always fix every line of a file
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
fsmonitor
Faster status operations with the Watchman file monitor (EXPERIMENTAL)
Integrates the file-watching program Watchman with Mercurial to produce
faster status results.
On a particular Linux system, for a real-world repository with over
400,000 files hosted on ext4, vanilla hg status takes 1.3 seconds. On
the same system, with fsmonitor it takes about 0.3 seconds.
fsmonitor requires no configuration -- it will tell Watchman about your
repository as necessary. You'll need to install Watchman from
https://facebook.github.io/watchman/ and make sure it is in your PATH.
fsmonitor is incompatible with the largefiles and eol extensions, and
will disable itself if any of those are active.
The following configuration options exist:
[fsmonitor]
mode = {off, on, paranoid}
When mode = off, fsmonitor will disable itself (similar to not loading
the extension at all). When mode = on, fsmonitor will be enabled (the
default). When mode = paranoid, fsmonitor will query both Watchman and
the filesystem, and ensure that the results are consistent.
[fsmonitor]
timeout = (float)
A value, in seconds, that determines how long fsmonitor will wait for
Watchman to return results. Defaults to 2.0.
[fsmonitor]
blacklistusers = (list of userids)
A list of usernames for which fsmonitor will disable itself altogether.
[fsmonitor]
walk_on_invalidate = (boolean)
Whether or not to walk the whole repo ourselves when our cached state
has been invalidated, for example when Watchman has been restarted or
.hgignore rules have been changed. Walking the repo in that case can
result in competing for I/O with Watchman. For large repos it is recom-
mended to set this value to false. You may wish to set this to true if
you have a very fast filesystem that can outpace the IPC overhead of
getting the result data for the full repo from Watchman. Defaults to
false.
[fsmonitor]
warn_when_unused = (boolean)
Whether to print a warning during certain operations when fsmonitor
would be beneficial to performance but isn't enabled.
[fsmonitor]
warn_update_file_count = (integer)
# or when mercurial is built with rust support
warn_update_file_count_rust = (integer)
If warn_when_unused is set and fsmonitor isn't enabled, a warning will
be printed during working directory updates if this many files will be
created.
git
grant Mercurial the ability to operate on Git repositories. (EXPERIMEN-
TAL)
This is currently super experimental. It probably will consume your
firstborn a la Rumpelstiltskin, etc.
githelp
try mapping git commands to Mercurial commands
Tries to map a given git command to a Mercurial command:
$ hg githelp -- git checkout master hg update master
If an unknown command or parameter combination is detected, an error is
produced.
Commands
Help
githelp
suggests the Mercurial equivalent of the given git command:
hg githelp
Usage: hg githelp -- <git command>
aliases: git
gpg
commands to sign and verify changesets
Commands
Signing changes (GPG)
sigcheck
verify all the signatures there may be for a particular revision:
hg sigcheck REV
verify all the signatures there may be for a particular revision
sign
add a signature for the current or given revision:
hg sign [OPTION]... [REV]...
If no revision is given, the parent of the working directory is used,
or tip if no revision is checked out.
The gpg.cmd config setting can be used to specify the command to run. A
default key can be specified with gpg.key.
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
Options:
-l, --local
make the signature local
-f, --force
sign even if the sigfile is modified
--no-commit
do not commit the sigfile after signing
-k,--key <ID>
the key id to sign with
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
sigs
list signed changesets:
hg sigs
list signed changesets
graphlog
command to view revision graphs from a shell (DEPRECATED)
The functionality of this extension has been include in core Mercurial
since version 2.3. Please use hg log -G ... instead.
This extension adds a --graph option to the incoming, outgoing and log
commands. When this options is given, an ASCII representation of the
revision graph is also shown.
Commands
Change navigation
glog
show revision history alongside an ASCII revision graph:
hg glog [OPTION]... [FILE]
Print a revision history alongside a revision graph drawn with ASCII
characters.
Nodes printed as an @ character are parents of the working directory.
This is an alias to hg log -G.
Options:
-f, --follow
follow changeset history, or file history across copies and re-
names
--follow-first
only follow the first parent of merge changesets (DEPRECATED)
-d,--date <DATE>
show revisions matching date spec
-C, --copies
show copied files
-k,--keyword <TEXT[+]>
do case-insensitive search for a given text
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
show the specified revision or revset
--removed
include revisions where files were removed
-m, --only-merges
show only merges (DEPRECATED)
-u,--user <USER[+]>
revisions committed by user
--only-branch <BRANCH[+]>
show only changesets within the given named branch (DEPRECATED)
-b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
show changesets within the given named branch
-P,--prune <REV[+]>
do not display revision or any of its ancestors
-p, --patch
show patch
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
-l,--limit <NUM>
limit number of changes displayed
-M, --no-merges
do not show merges
--stat output diffstat-style summary of changes
-G, --graph
show the revision DAG
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
hgk
browse the repository in a graphical way
The hgk extension allows browsing the history of a repository in a
graphical way. It requires Tcl/Tk version 8.4 or later. (Tcl/Tk is not
distributed with Mercurial.)
hgk consists of two parts: a Tcl script that does the displaying and
querying of information, and an extension to Mercurial named hgk.py,
which provides hooks for hgk to get information. hgk can be found in
the contrib directory, and the extension is shipped in the hgext repos-
itory, and needs to be enabled.
The hg view command will launch the hgk Tcl script. For this command to
work, hgk must be in your search path. Alternately, you can specify the
path to hgk in your configuration file:
[hgk]
path = /location/of/hgk
hgk can make use of the extdiff extension to visualize revisions. As-
suming you had already configured extdiff vdiff command, just add:
[hgk]
vdiff=vdiff
Revisions context menu will now display additional entries to fire vd-
iff on hovered and selected revisions.
Commands
Change navigation
view
start interactive history viewer:
hg view [-l LIMIT] [REVRANGE]
start interactive history viewer
Options:
-l,--limit <NUM>
limit number of changes displayed
Uncategorized commands
highlight
syntax highlighting for hgweb (requires Pygments)
It depends on the Pygments syntax highlighting library:
http://pygments.org/
There are the following configuration options:
[web]
pygments_style = <style> (default: colorful)
highlightfiles = <fileset> (default: size('<5M'))
highlightonlymatchfilename = <bool> (default False)
highlightonlymatchfilename will only highlight files if their type
could be identified by their filename. When this is not enabled (the
default), Pygments will try very hard to identify the file type from
content and any match (even matches with a low confidence score) will
be used.
histedit
interactive history editing
With this extension installed, Mercurial gains one new command: histe-
dit. Usage is as follows, assuming the following history:
@ 3[tip] 7c2fd3b9020c 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
| Add delta
|
o 2 030b686bedc4 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
| Add gamma
|
o 1 c561b4e977df 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
| Add beta
|
o 0 d8d2fcd0e319 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
Add alpha
If you were to run hg histedit c561b4e977df, you would see the follow-
ing file open in your editor:
pick c561b4e977df Add beta
pick 030b686bedc4 Add gamma
pick 7c2fd3b9020c Add delta
# Edit history between c561b4e977df and 7c2fd3b9020c
#
# Commits are listed from least to most recent
#
# Commands:
# p, pick = use commit
# e, edit = use commit, but allow edits before making new commit
# f, fold = use commit, but combine it with the one above
# r, roll = like fold, but discard this commit's description and date
# d, drop = remove commit from history
# m, mess = edit commit message without changing commit content
# b, base = checkout changeset and apply further changesets from there
#
In this file, lines beginning with # are ignored. You must specify a
rule for each revision in your history. For example, if you had meant
to add gamma before beta, and then wanted to add delta in the same re-
vision as beta, you would reorganize the file to look like this:
pick 030b686bedc4 Add gamma
pick c561b4e977df Add beta
fold 7c2fd3b9020c Add delta
# Edit history between c561b4e977df and 7c2fd3b9020c
#
# Commits are listed from least to most recent
#
# Commands:
# p, pick = use commit
# e, edit = use commit, but allow edits before making new commit
# f, fold = use commit, but combine it with the one above
# r, roll = like fold, but discard this commit's description and date
# d, drop = remove commit from history
# m, mess = edit commit message without changing commit content
# b, base = checkout changeset and apply further changesets from there
#
At which point you close the editor and histedit starts working. When
you specify a fold operation, histedit will open an editor when it
folds those revisions together, offering you a chance to clean up the
commit message:
Add beta
***
Add delta
Edit the commit message to your liking, then close the editor. The date
used for the commit will be the later of the two commits' dates. For
this example, let's assume that the commit message was changed to Add
beta and delta. After histedit has run and had a chance to remove any
old or temporary revisions it needed, the history looks like this:
@ 2[tip] 989b4d060121 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
| Add beta and delta.
|
o 1 081603921c3f 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
| Add gamma
|
o 0 d8d2fcd0e319 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
Add alpha
Note that histedit does not remove any revisions (even its own tempo-
rary ones) until after it has completed all the editing operations, so
it will probably perform several strip operations when it's done. For
the above example, it had to run strip twice. Strip can be slow depend-
ing on a variety of factors, so you might need to be a little patient.
You can choose to keep the original revisions by passing the --keep
flag.
The edit operation will drop you back to a command prompt, allowing you
to edit files freely, or even use hg record to commit some changes as a
separate commit. When you're done, any remaining uncommitted changes
will be committed as well. When done, run hg histedit --continue to
finish this step. If there are uncommitted changes, you'll be prompted
for a new commit message, but the default commit message will be the
original message for the edit ed revision, and the date of the original
commit will be preserved.
The message operation will give you a chance to revise a commit message
without changing the contents. It's a shortcut for doing edit immedi-
ately followed by hg histedit --continue`.
If histedit encounters a conflict when moving a revision (while han-
dling pick or fold), it'll stop in a similar manner to edit with the
difference that it won't prompt you for a commit message when done. If
you decide at this point that you don't like how much work it will be
to rearrange history, or that you made a mistake, you can use hg histe-
dit --abort to abandon the new changes you have made and return to the
state before you attempted to edit your history.
If we clone the histedit-ed example repository above and add four more
changes, such that we have the following history:
@ 6[tip] 038383181893 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 stefan
| Add theta
|
o 5 140988835471 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 stefan
| Add eta
|
o 4 122930637314 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 stefan
| Add zeta
|
o 3 836302820282 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 stefan
| Add epsilon
|
o 2 989b4d060121 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
| Add beta and delta.
|
o 1 081603921c3f 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
| Add gamma
|
o 0 d8d2fcd0e319 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
Add alpha
If you run hg histedit --outgoing on the clone then it is the same as
running hg histedit 836302820282. If you need plan to push to a reposi-
tory that Mercurial does not detect to be related to the source repo,
you can add a --force option.
Config
Histedit rule lines are truncated to 80 characters by default. You can
customize this behavior by setting a different length in your configu-
ration file:
[histedit]
linelen = 120 # truncate rule lines at 120 characters
The summary of a change can be customized as well:
[histedit]
summary-template = '{rev} {bookmarks} {desc|firstline}'
The customized summary should be kept short enough that rule lines will
fit in the configured line length. See above if that requires cus-
tomization.
hg histedit attempts to automatically choose an appropriate base revi-
sion to use. To change which base revision is used, define a revset in
your configuration file:
[histedit]
defaultrev = only(.) & draft()
By default each edited revision needs to be present in histedit com-
mands. To remove revision you need to use drop operation. You can con-
figure the drop to be implicit for missing commits by adding:
[histedit]
dropmissing = True
By default, histedit will close the transaction after each action. For
performance purposes, you can configure histedit to use a single trans-
action across the entire histedit. WARNING: This setting introduces a
significant risk of losing the work you've done in a histedit if the
histedit aborts unexpectedly:
[histedit]
singletransaction = True
Commands
Change manipulation
histedit
interactively edit changeset history:
hg histedit [OPTIONS] ([ANCESTOR] | --outgoing [URL])
This command lets you edit a linear series of changesets (up to and in-
cluding the working directory, which should be clean). You can:
• pick to [re]order a changeset
• drop to omit changeset
• mess to reword the changeset commit message
• fold to combine it with the preceding changeset (using the later
date)
• roll like fold, but discarding this commit's description and date
• edit to edit this changeset (preserving date)
• base to checkout changeset and apply further changesets from there
There are a number of ways to select the root changeset:
• Specify ANCESTOR directly
• Use --outgoing -- it will be the first linear changeset not included
in destination. (See hg help config.paths.default-push)
• Otherwise, the value from the "histedit.defaultrev" config option is
used as a revset to select the base revision when ANCESTOR is not
specified. The first revision returned by the revset is used. By de-
fault, this selects the editable history that is unique to the ances-
try of the working directory.
If you use --outgoing, this command will abort if there are ambiguous
outgoing revisions. For example, if there are multiple branches con-
taining outgoing revisions.
Use "min(outgoing() and ::.)" or similar revset specification instead
of --outgoing to specify edit target revision exactly in such ambiguous
situation. See hg help revsets for detail about selecting revisions.
Examples:
• A number of changes have been made. Revision 3 is no longer
needed.
Start history editing from revision 3:
hg histedit -r 3
An editor opens, containing the list of revisions, with specific
actions specified:
pick 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar
pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog
pick 0a9639fcda9d 5 Morgify the cromulancy
Additional information about the possible actions to take appears
below the list of revisions.
To remove revision 3 from the history, its action (at the begin-
ning of the relevant line) is changed to 'drop':
drop 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar
pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog
pick 0a9639fcda9d 5 Morgify the cromulancy
• A number of changes have been made. Revision 2 and 4 need to be
swapped.
Start history editing from revision 2:
hg histedit -r 2
An editor opens, containing the list of revisions, with specific
actions specified:
pick 252a1af424ad 2 Blorb a morgwazzle
pick 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar
pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog
To swap revision 2 and 4, its lines are swapped in the editor:
pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog
pick 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar
pick 252a1af424ad 2 Blorb a morgwazzle
Returns 0 on success, 1 if user intervention is required (not only for
intentional "edit" command, but also for resolving unexpected con-
flicts).
Options:
--commands <FILE>
read history edits from the specified file
-c, --continue
continue an edit already in progress
--edit-plan
edit remaining actions list
-k, --keep
don't strip old nodes after edit is complete
--abort
abort an edit in progress
-o, --outgoing
changesets not found in destination
-f, --force
force outgoing even for unrelated repositories
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
first revision to be edited
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
hooklib
collection of simple hooks for common tasks (EXPERIMENTAL)
This extension provides a number of simple hooks to handle issues com-
monly found in repositories with many contributors: - email notifica-
tion when changesets move from draft to public phase - email notifica-
tion when changesets are obsoleted - enforcement of draft phase for all
incoming changesets - enforcement of a no-branch-merge policy - en-
forcement of a no-multiple-heads policy
The implementation of the hooks is subject to change, e.g. whether to
implement them as individual hooks or merge them into the notify exten-
sion as option. The functionality itself is planned to be supported
long-term.
infinitepush
store some pushes in a remote blob store on the server (EXPERIMEN-
TAL)
IMPORTANT: if you use this extension, please contact
mercurial-devel@mercurial-scm.org ASAP. This extension is believed to
be unused and barring learning of users of this functionality, we will
delete this code at the end of 2020.
[infinitepush] # Server-side and client-side option. Pattern of the
infinitepush bookmark branchpattern = PATTERN
# Server or client server = False
# Server-side option. Possible values: 'disk' or 'sql'. Fails if not
set indextype = disk
# Server-side option. Used only if indextype=sql. # Format:
'IP:PORT:DB_NAME:USER:PASSWORD' sqlhost = IP:PORT:DB_NAME:USER:PASS-
WORD
# Server-side option. Used only if indextype=disk. # Filesystem
path to the index store indexpath = PATH
# Server-side option. Possible values: 'disk' or 'external' # Fails
if not set storetype = disk
# Server-side option. # Path to the binary that will save bundle to
the bundlestore # Formatted cmd line will be passed to it (see
put_args) put_binary = put
# Serser-side option. Used only if storetype=external. # Format
cmd-line string for put binary. Placeholder: {filename} put_args =
{filename}
# Server-side option. # Path to the binary that get bundle from the
bundlestore. # Formatted cmd line will be passed to it (see
get_args) get_binary = get
# Serser-side option. Used only if storetype=external. # Format
cmd-line string for get binary. Placeholders: {filename} {handle}
get_args = {filename} {handle}
# Server-side option logfile = FIlE
# Server-side option loglevel = DEBUG
# Server-side option. Used only if indextype=sql. # Sets mysql
wait_timeout option. waittimeout = 300
# Server-side option. Used only if indextype=sql. # Sets mysql inn-
odb_lock_wait_timeout option. locktimeout = 120
# Server-side option. Used only if indextype=sql. # Name of the
repository reponame = ''
# Client-side option. Used by --list-remote option. List of remote
scratch # patterns to list if no patterns are specified. default-
remotepatterns = ['*']
# Instructs infinitepush to forward all received bundle2 parts to
the # bundle for storage. Defaults to False. storeallparts = True
# routes each incoming push to the bundlestore. defaults to False
pushtobundlestore = True
[remotenames] # Client-side option # This option should be set only
if remotenames extension is enabled. # Whether remote bookmarks are
tracked by remotenames extension. bookmarks = True
journal
track previous positions of bookmarks (EXPERIMENTAL)
This extension adds a new command: hg journal, which shows you where
bookmarks were previously located.
Commands
Change organization
journal
show the previous position of bookmarks and the working copy:
hg journal [OPTION]... [BOOKMARKNAME]
The journal is used to see the previous commits that bookmarks and the
working copy pointed to. By default the previous locations for the
working copy. Passing a bookmark name will show all the previous posi-
tions of that bookmark. Use the --all switch to show previous locations
for all bookmarks and the working copy; each line will then include the
bookmark name, or '.' for the working copy, as well.
If name starts with re:, the remainder of the name is treated as a reg-
ular expression. To match a name that actually starts with re:, use the
prefix literal:.
By default hg journal only shows the commit hash and the command that
was running at that time. -v/--verbose will show the prior hash, the
user, and the time at which it happened.
Use -c/--commits to output log information on each commit hash; at this
point you can use the usual --patch, --git, --stat and --template
switches to alter the log output for these.
hg journal -T json can be used to produce machine readable output.
Options:
--all show history for all names
-c, --commits
show commit metadata
-p, --patch
show patch
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
-l,--limit <NUM>
limit number of changes displayed
--stat output diffstat-style summary of changes
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
keyword
expand keywords in tracked files
This extension expands RCS/CVS-like or self-customized $Keywords$ in
tracked text files selected by your configuration.
Keywords are only expanded in local repositories and not stored in the
change history. The mechanism can be regarded as a convenience for the
current user or for archive distribution.
Keywords expand to the changeset data pertaining to the latest change
relative to the working directory parent of each file.
Configuration is done in the [keyword], [keywordset] and [keywordmaps]
sections of hgrc files.
Example:
[keyword]
# expand keywords in every python file except those matching "x*"
**.py =
x* = ignore
[keywordset]
# prefer svn- over cvs-like default keywordmaps
svn = True
Note The more specific you are in your filename patterns the less you
lose speed in huge repositories.
For [keywordmaps] template mapping and expansion demonstration and con-
trol run hg kwdemo. See hg help templates for a list of available tem-
plates and filters.
Three additional date template filters are provided:
utcdate
"2006/09/18 15:13:13"
svnutcdate
"2006-09-18 15:13:13Z"
svnisodate
"2006-09-18 08:13:13 -700 (Mon, 18 Sep 2006)"
The default template mappings (view with hg kwdemo -d) can be replaced
with customized keywords and templates. Again, run hg kwdemo to control
the results of your configuration changes.
Before changing/disabling active keywords, you must run hg kwshrink to
avoid storing expanded keywords in the change history.
To force expansion after enabling it, or a configuration change, run hg
kwexpand.
Expansions spanning more than one line and incremental expansions, like
CVS' $Log$, are not supported. A keyword template map "Log = {desc}"
expands to the first line of the changeset description.
Commands
Uncategorized commands
kwdemo
print [keywordmaps] configuration and an expansion example:
hg kwdemo [-d] [-f RCFILE] [TEMPLATEMAP]...
Show current, custom, or default keyword template maps and their expan-
sions.
Extend the current configuration by specifying maps as arguments and
using -f/--rcfile to source an external hgrc file.
Use -d/--default to disable current configuration.
See hg help templates for information on templates and filters.
Options:
-d, --default
show default keyword template maps
-f,--rcfile <FILE>
read maps from rcfile
kwexpand
expand keywords in the working directory:
hg kwexpand [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Run after (re)enabling keyword expansion.
kwexpand refuses to run if given files contain local changes.
Options:
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
kwfiles
show files configured for keyword expansion:
hg kwfiles [OPTION]... [FILE]...
List which files in the working directory are matched by the [keyword]
configuration patterns.
Useful to prevent inadvertent keyword expansion and to speed up execu-
tion by including only files that are actual candidates for expansion.
See hg help keyword on how to construct patterns both for inclusion and
exclusion of files.
With -A/--all and -v/--verbose the codes used to show the status of
files are:
K = keyword expansion candidate
k = keyword expansion candidate (not tracked)
I = ignored
i = ignored (not tracked)
Options:
-A, --all
show keyword status flags of all files
-i, --ignore
show files excluded from expansion
-u, --unknown
only show unknown (not tracked) files
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
kwshrink
revert expanded keywords in the working directory:
hg kwshrink [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Must be run before changing/disabling active keywords.
kwshrink refuses to run if given files contain local changes.
Options:
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
largefiles
track large binary files
Large binary files tend to be not very compressible, not very diffable,
and not at all mergeable. Such files are not handled efficiently by
Mercurial's storage format (revlog), which is based on compressed bi-
nary deltas; storing large binary files as regular Mercurial files
wastes bandwidth and disk space and increases Mercurial's memory usage.
The largefiles extension addresses these problems by adding a central-
ized client-server layer on top of Mercurial: largefiles live in a cen-
tral store out on the network somewhere, and you only fetch the revi-
sions that you need when you need them.
largefiles works by maintaining a "standin file" in .hglf/ for each
largefile. The standins are small (41 bytes: an SHA-1 hash plus new-
line) and are tracked by Mercurial. Largefile revisions are identified
by the SHA-1 hash of their contents, which is written to the standin.
largefiles uses that revision ID to get/put largefile revisions from/to
the central store. This saves both disk space and bandwidth, since you
don't need to retrieve all historical revisions of large files when you
clone or pull.
To start a new repository or add new large binary files, just add
--large to your hg add command. For example:
$ dd if=/dev/urandom of=randomdata count=2000
$ hg add --large randomdata
$ hg commit -m "add randomdata as a largefile"
When you push a changeset that adds/modifies largefiles to a remote
repository, its largefile revisions will be uploaded along with it.
Note that the remote Mercurial must also have the largefiles extension
enabled for this to work.
When you pull a changeset that affects largefiles from a remote reposi-
tory, the largefiles for the changeset will by default not be pulled
down. However, when you update to such a revision, any largefiles
needed by that revision are downloaded and cached (if they have never
been downloaded before). One way to pull largefiles when pulling is
thus to use --update, which will update your working copy to the latest
pulled revision (and thereby downloading any new largefiles).
If you want to pull largefiles you don't need for update yet, then you
can use pull with the --lfrev option or the hg lfpull command.
If you know you are pulling from a non-default location and want to
download all the largefiles that correspond to the new changesets at
the same time, then you can pull with --lfrev "pulled()".
If you just want to ensure that you will have the largefiles needed to
merge or rebase with new heads that you are pulling, then you can pull
with --lfrev "head(pulled())" flag to pre-emptively download any large-
files that are new in the heads you are pulling.
Keep in mind that network access may now be required to update to
changesets that you have not previously updated to. The nature of the
largefiles extension means that updating is no longer guaranteed to be
a local-only operation.
If you already have large files tracked by Mercurial without the large-
files extension, you will need to convert your repository in order to
benefit from largefiles. This is done with the hg lfconvert command:
$ hg lfconvert --size 10 oldrepo newrepo
In repositories that already have largefiles in them, any new file over
10MB will automatically be added as a largefile. To change this thresh-
old, set largefiles.minsize in your Mercurial config file to the mini-
mum size in megabytes to track as a largefile, or use the --lfsize op-
tion to the add command (also in megabytes):
[largefiles]
minsize = 2
$ hg add --lfsize 2
The largefiles.patterns config option allows you to specify a list of
filename patterns (see hg help patterns) that should always be tracked
as largefiles:
[largefiles]
patterns =
*.jpg
re:.*\.(png|bmp)$
library.zip
content/audio/*
Files that match one of these patterns will be added as largefiles re-
gardless of their size.
The largefiles.minsize and largefiles.patterns config options will be
ignored for any repositories not already containing a largefile. To add
the first largefile to a repository, you must explicitly do so with the
--large flag passed to the hg add command.
Commands
Uncategorized commands
lfconvert
convert a normal repository to a largefiles repository:
hg lfconvert SOURCE DEST [FILE ...]
Convert repository SOURCE to a new repository DEST, identical to SOURCE
except that certain files will be converted as largefiles: specifi-
cally, any file that matches any PATTERN or whose size is above the
minimum size threshold is converted as a largefile. The size used to
determine whether or not to track a file as a largefile is the size of
the first version of the file. The minimum size can be specified either
with --size or in configuration as largefiles.size.
After running this command you will need to make sure that largefiles
is enabled anywhere you intend to push the new repository.
Use --to-normal to convert largefiles back to normal files; after this,
the DEST repository can be used without largefiles at all.
Options:
-s,--size <SIZE>
minimum size (MB) for files to be converted as largefiles
--to-normal
convert from a largefiles repo to a normal repo
lfpull
pull largefiles for the specified revisions from the specified source:
hg lfpull -r REV... [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [SOURCE]
Pull largefiles that are referenced from local changesets but missing
locally, pulling from a remote repository to the local cache.
If SOURCE is omitted, the 'default' path will be used. See hg help
urls for more information.
Some examples:
• pull largefiles for all branch heads:
hg lfpull -r "head() and not closed()"
• pull largefiles on the default branch:
hg lfpull -r "branch(default)"
Options:
-r,--rev <VALUE[+]>
pull largefiles for these revisions
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
lfs
lfs - large file support (EXPERIMENTAL)
This extension allows large files to be tracked outside of the normal
repository storage and stored on a centralized server, similar to the
largefiles extension. The git-lfs protocol is used when communicating
with the server, so existing git infrastructure can be harnessed. Even
though the files are stored outside of the repository, they are still
integrity checked in the same manner as normal files.
The files stored outside of the repository are downloaded on demand,
which reduces the time to clone, and possibly the local disk usage.
This changes fundamental workflows in a DVCS, so careful thought should
be given before deploying it. hg convert can be used to convert LFS
repositories to normal repositories that no longer require this exten-
sion, and do so without changing the commit hashes. This allows the
extension to be disabled if the centralized workflow becomes burden-
some. However, the pre and post convert clones will not be able to
communicate with each other unless the extension is enabled on both.
To start a new repository, or to add LFS files to an existing one, just
create an .hglfs file as described below in the root directory of the
repository. Typically, this file should be put under version control,
so that the settings will propagate to other repositories with push and
pull. During any commit, Mercurial will consult this file to determine
if an added or modified file should be stored externally. The type of
storage depends on the characteristics of the file at each commit. A
file that is near a size threshold may switch back and forth between
LFS and normal storage, as needed.
Alternately, both normal repositories and largefile controlled reposi-
tories can be converted to LFS by using hg convert and the lfs.track
config option described below. The .hglfs file should then be created
and added, to control subsequent LFS selection. The hashes are also
unchanged in this case. The LFS and non-LFS repositories can be dis-
tinguished because the LFS repository will abort any command if this
extension is disabled.
Committed LFS files are held locally, until the repository is pushed.
Prior to pushing the normal repository data, the LFS files that are
tracked by the outgoing commits are automatically uploaded to the con-
figured central server. No LFS files are transferred on hg pull or hg
clone. Instead, the files are downloaded on demand as they need to be
read, if a cached copy cannot be found locally. Both committing and
downloading an LFS file will link the file to a usercache, to speed up
future access. See the usercache config setting described below.
The extension reads its configuration from a versioned .hglfs configu-
ration file found in the root of the working directory. The .hglfs file
uses the same syntax as all other Mercurial configuration files. It
uses a single section, [track].
The [track] section specifies which files are stored as LFS (or not).
Each line is keyed by a file pattern, with a predicate value. The
first file pattern match is used, so put more specific patterns first.
The available predicates are all(), none(), and size(). See "hg help
filesets.size" for the latter.
Example versioned .hglfs file:
[track]
# No Makefile or python file, anywhere, will be LFS
**Makefile = none()
**.py = none()
**.zip = all()
**.exe = size(">1MB")
# Catchall for everything not matched above
** = size(">10MB")
Configs:
[lfs]
# Remote endpoint. Multiple protocols are supported:
# - http(s)://user:pass@example.com/path
# git-lfs endpoint
# - file:///tmp/path
# local filesystem, usually for testing
# if unset, lfs will assume the remote repository also handles blob storage
# for http(s) URLs. Otherwise, lfs will prompt to set this when it must
# use this value.
# (default: unset)
url = https://example.com/repo.git/info/lfs
# Which files to track in LFS. Path tests are "**.extname" for file
# extensions, and "path:under/some/directory" for path prefix. Both
# are relative to the repository root.
# File size can be tested with the "size()" fileset, and tests can be
# joined with fileset operators. (See "hg help filesets.operators".)
#
# Some examples:
# - all() # everything
# - none() # nothing
# - size(">20MB") # larger than 20MB
# - !**.txt # anything not a *.txt file
# - **.zip | **.tar.gz | **.7z # some types of compressed files
# - path:bin # files under "bin" in the project root
# - (**.php & size(">2MB")) | (**.js & size(">5MB")) | **.tar.gz
# | (path:bin & !path:/bin/README) | size(">1GB")
# (default: none())
#
# This is ignored if there is a tracked '.hglfs' file, and this setting
# will eventually be deprecated and removed.
track = size(">10M")
# how many times to retry before giving up on transferring an object
retry = 5
# the local directory to store lfs files for sharing across local clones.
# If not set, the cache is located in an OS specific cache location.
usercache = /path/to/global/cache
Commands
Uncategorized commands
logtoprocess
send ui.log() data to a subprocess (EXPERIMENTAL)
This extension lets you specify a shell command per ui.log() event,
sending all remaining arguments to as environment variables to that
command.
Positional arguments construct a log message, which is passed in the
MSG1 environment variables. Each keyword argument is set as a OPT_UP-
PERCASE_KEY variable (so the key is uppercased, and prefixed with
OPT_). The original event name is passed in the EVENT environment vari-
able, and the process ID of mercurial is given in HGPID.
So given a call ui.log('foo', 'bar %s ', 'baz', spam='eggs'), a script
configured for the `foo event can expect an environment with MSG1=bar
baz, and OPT_SPAM=eggs.
Scripts are configured in the [logtoprocess] section, each key an event
name. For example:
[logtoprocess]
commandexception = echo "$MSG1" > /var/log/mercurial_exceptions.log
would log the warning message and traceback of any failed command dis-
patch.
Scripts are run asynchronously as detached daemon processes; mercurial
will not ensure that they exit cleanly.
mq
manage a stack of patches
This extension lets you work with a stack of patches in a Mercurial
repository. It manages two stacks of patches - all known patches, and
applied patches (subset of known patches).
Known patches are represented as patch files in the .hg/patches direc-
tory. Applied patches are both patch files and changesets.
Common tasks (use hg help COMMAND for more details):
create new patch qnew
import existing patch qimport
print patch series qseries
print applied patches qapplied
add known patch to applied stack qpush
remove patch from applied stack qpop
refresh contents of top applied patch qrefresh
By default, mq will automatically use git patches when required to
avoid losing file mode changes, copy records, binary files or empty
files creations or deletions. This behavior can be configured with:
[mq]
git = auto/keep/yes/no
If set to 'keep', mq will obey the [diff] section configuration while
preserving existing git patches upon qrefresh. If set to 'yes' or 'no',
mq will override the [diff] section and always generate git or regular
patches, possibly losing data in the second case.
It may be desirable for mq changesets to be kept in the secret phase
(see hg help phases), which can be enabled with the following setting:
[mq]
secret = True
You will by default be managing a patch queue named "patches". You can
create other, independent patch queues with the hg qqueue command.
If the working directory contains uncommitted files, qpush, qpop and
qgoto abort immediately. If -f/--force is used, the changes are dis-
carded. Setting:
[mq]
keepchanges = True
make them behave as if --keep-changes were passed, and non-conflicting
local changes will be tolerated and preserved. If incompatible options
such as -f/--force or --exact are passed, this setting is ignored.
This extension used to provide a strip command. This command now lives
in the strip extension.
Commands
Repository creation
qclone
clone main and patch repository at same time:
hg qclone [OPTION]... SOURCE [DEST]
If source is local, destination will have no patches applied. If source
is remote, this command can not check if patches are applied in source,
so cannot guarantee that patches are not applied in destination. If you
clone remote repository, be sure before that it has no patches applied.
Source patch repository is looked for in <src>/.hg/patches by default.
Use -p <url> to change.
The patch directory must be a nested Mercurial repository, as would be
created by hg init --mq.
Return 0 on success.
Options:
--pull use pull protocol to copy metadata
-U, --noupdate
do not update the new working directories
--uncompressed
use uncompressed transfer (fast over LAN)
-p,--patches <REPO>
location of source patch repository
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)
qinit
init a new queue repository (DEPRECATED):
hg qinit [-c]
The queue repository is unversioned by default. If -c/--create-repo is
specified, qinit will create a separate nested repository for patches
(qinit -c may also be run later to convert an unversioned patch reposi-
tory into a versioned one). You can use qcommit to commit changes to
this queue repository.
This command is deprecated. Without -c, it's implied by other relevant
commands. With -c, use hg init --mq instead.
Options:
-c, --create-repo
create queue repository
Change creation
qcommit
commit changes in the queue repository (DEPRECATED):
hg qcommit [OPTION]... [FILE]...
This command is deprecated; use hg commit --mq instead.
Options:
-A, --addremove
mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing
--close-branch
mark a branch head as closed
--amend
amend the parent of the working directory
-s, --secret
use the secret phase for committing
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
--force-close-branch
forcibly close branch from a non-head changeset (ADVANCED)
-i, --interactive
use interactive mode
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: qci
qnew
create a new patch:
hg qnew [-e] [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] PATCH [FILE]...
qnew creates a new patch on top of the currently-applied patch (if
any). The patch will be initialized with any outstanding changes in the
working directory. You may also use -I/--include, -X/--exclude, and/or
a list of files after the patch name to add only changes to matching
files to the new patch, leaving the rest as uncommitted modifications.
-u/--user and -d/--date can be used to set the (given) user and date,
respectively. -U/--currentuser and -D/--currentdate set user to current
user and date to current date.
-e/--edit, -m/--message or -l/--logfile set the patch header as well as
the commit message. If none is specified, the header is empty and the
commit message is '[mq]: PATCH'.
Use the -g/--git option to keep the patch in the git extended diff for-
mat. Read the diffs help topic for more information on why this is im-
portant for preserving permission changes and copy/rename information.
Returns 0 on successful creation of a new patch.
Options:
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-f, --force
import uncommitted changes (DEPRECATED)
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
-U, --currentuser
add "From: <current user>" to patch
-u,--user <USER>
add "From: <USER>" to patch
-D, --currentdate
add "Date: <current date>" to patch
-d,--date <DATE>
add "Date: <DATE>" to patch
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
qrefresh
update the current patch:
hg qrefresh [-I] [-X] [-e] [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] [-s] [FILE]...
If any file patterns are provided, the refreshed patch will contain
only the modifications that match those patterns; the remaining modifi-
cations will remain in the working directory.
If -s/--short is specified, files currently included in the patch will
be refreshed just like matched files and remain in the patch.
If -e/--edit is specified, Mercurial will start your configured editor
for you to enter a message. In case qrefresh fails, you will find a
backup of your message in .hg/last-message.txt.
hg add/remove/copy/rename work as usual, though you might want to use
git-style patches (-g/--git or [diff] git=1) to track copies and re-
names. See the diffs help topic for more information on the git diff
format.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
-s, --short
refresh only files already in the patch and specified files
-U, --currentuser
add/update author field in patch with current user
-u,--user <USER>
add/update author field in patch with given user
-D, --currentdate
add/update date field in patch with current date
-d,--date <DATE>
add/update date field in patch with given date
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
Change manipulation
qfold
fold the named patches into the current patch:
hg qfold [-e] [-k] [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] PATCH...
Patches must not yet be applied. Each patch will be successively ap-
plied to the current patch in the order given. If all the patches apply
successfully, the current patch will be refreshed with the new cumula-
tive patch, and the folded patches will be deleted. With -k/--keep, the
folded patch files will not be removed afterwards.
The header for each folded patch will be concatenated with the current
patch header, separated by a line of * * *.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-k, --keep
keep folded patch files
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
Change organization
qapplied
print the patches already applied:
hg qapplied [-1] [-s] [PATCH]
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-1, --last
show only the preceding applied patch
-s, --summary
print first line of patch header
qdelete
remove patches from queue:
hg qdelete [-k] [PATCH]...
The patches must not be applied, and at least one patch is required.
Exact patch identifiers must be given. With -k/--keep, the patch files
are preserved in the patch directory.
To stop managing a patch and move it into permanent history, use the hg
qfinish command.
Options:
-k, --keep
keep patch file
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
stop managing a revision (DEPRECATED)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: qremove qrm
qfinish
move applied patches into repository history:
hg qfinish [-a] [REV]...
Finishes the specified revisions (corresponding to applied patches) by
moving them out of mq control into regular repository history.
Accepts a revision range or the -a/--applied option. If --applied is
specified, all applied mq revisions are removed from mq control. Other-
wise, the given revisions must be at the base of the stack of applied
patches.
This can be especially useful if your changes have been applied to an
upstream repository, or if you are about to push your changes to up-
stream.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-a, --applied
finish all applied changesets
qgoto
push or pop patches until named patch is at top of stack:
hg qgoto [OPTION]... PATCH
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
--keep-changes
tolerate non-conflicting local changes
-f, --force
overwrite any local changes
--no-backup
do not save backup copies of files
qguard
set or print guards for a patch:
hg qguard [-l] [-n] [PATCH] [-- [+GUARD]... [-GUARD]...]
Guards control whether a patch can be pushed. A patch with no guards is
always pushed. A patch with a positive guard ("+foo") is pushed only if
the hg qselect command has activated it. A patch with a negative guard
("-foo") is never pushed if the hg qselect command has activated it.
With no arguments, print the currently active guards. With arguments,
set guards for the named patch.
Note Specifying negative guards now requires '--'.
To set guards on another patch:
hg qguard other.patch -- +2.6.17 -stable
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-l, --list
list all patches and guards
-n, --none
drop all guards
qheader
print the header of the topmost or specified patch:
hg qheader [PATCH]
Returns 0 on success.
qnext
print the name of the next pushable patch:
hg qnext [-s]
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-s, --summary
print first line of patch header
qpop
pop the current patch off the stack:
hg qpop [-a] [-f] [PATCH | INDEX]
Without argument, pops off the top of the patch stack. If given a patch
name, keeps popping off patches until the named patch is at the top of
the stack.
By default, abort if the working directory contains uncommitted
changes. With --keep-changes, abort only if the uncommitted files over-
lap with patched files. With -f/--force, backup and discard changes
made to such files.
Return 0 on success.
Options:
-a, --all
pop all patches
-n,--name <NAME>
queue name to pop (DEPRECATED)
--keep-changes
tolerate non-conflicting local changes
-f, --force
forget any local changes to patched files
--no-backup
do not save backup copies of files
qprev
print the name of the preceding applied patch:
hg qprev [-s]
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-s, --summary
print first line of patch header
qpush
push the next patch onto the stack:
hg qpush [-f] [-l] [-a] [--move] [PATCH | INDEX]
By default, abort if the working directory contains uncommitted
changes. With --keep-changes, abort only if the uncommitted files over-
lap with patched files. With -f/--force, backup and patch over uncom-
mitted changes.
Return 0 on success.
Options:
--keep-changes
tolerate non-conflicting local changes
-f, --force
apply on top of local changes
-e, --exact
apply the target patch to its recorded parent
-l, --list
list patch name in commit text
-a, --all
apply all patches
-m, --merge
merge from another queue (DEPRECATED)
-n,--name <NAME>
merge queue name (DEPRECATED)
--move reorder patch series and apply only the patch
--no-backup
do not save backup copies of files
qqueue
manage multiple patch queues:
hg qqueue [OPTION] [QUEUE]
Supports switching between different patch queues, as well as creating
new patch queues and deleting existing ones.
Omitting a queue name or specifying -l/--list will show you the regis-
tered queues - by default the "normal" patches queue is registered. The
currently active queue will be marked with "(active)". Specifying --ac-
tive will print only the name of the active queue.
To create a new queue, use -c/--create. The queue is automatically made
active, except in the case where there are applied patches from the
currently active queue in the repository. Then the queue will only be
created and switching will fail.
To delete an existing queue, use --delete. You cannot delete the cur-
rently active queue.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-l, --list
list all available queues
--active
print name of active queue
-c, --create
create new queue
--rename
rename active queue
--delete
delete reference to queue
--purge
delete queue, and remove patch dir
qrename
rename a patch:
hg qrename PATCH1 [PATCH2]
With one argument, renames the current patch to PATCH1. With two argu-
ments, renames PATCH1 to PATCH2.
Returns 0 on success.
aliases: qmv
qrestore
restore the queue state saved by a revision (DEPRECATED):
hg qrestore [-d] [-u] REV
This command is deprecated, use hg rebase instead.
Options:
-d, --delete
delete save entry
-u, --update
update queue working directory
qsave
save current queue state (DEPRECATED):
hg qsave [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] [-c] [-n NAME] [-e] [-f]
This command is deprecated, use hg rebase instead.
Options:
-c, --copy
copy patch directory
-n,--name <NAME>
copy directory name
-e, --empty
clear queue status file
-f, --force
force copy
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
qselect
set or print guarded patches to push:
hg qselect [OPTION]... [GUARD]...
Use the hg qguard command to set or print guards on patch, then use qs-
elect to tell mq which guards to use. A patch will be pushed if it has
no guards or any positive guards match the currently selected guard,
but will not be pushed if any negative guards match the current guard.
For example:
qguard foo.patch -- -stable (negative guard)
qguard bar.patch +stable (positive guard)
qselect stable
This activates the "stable" guard. mq will skip foo.patch (because it
has a negative match) but push bar.patch (because it has a positive
match).
With no arguments, prints the currently active guards. With one argu-
ment, sets the active guard.
Use -n/--none to deactivate guards (no other arguments needed). When
no guards are active, patches with positive guards are skipped and
patches with negative guards are pushed.
qselect can change the guards on applied patches. It does not pop
guarded patches by default. Use --pop to pop back to the last applied
patch that is not guarded. Use --reapply (which implies --pop) to push
back to the current patch afterwards, but skip guarded patches.
Use -s/--series to print a list of all guards in the series file (no
other arguments needed). Use -v for more information.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-n, --none
disable all guards
-s, --series
list all guards in series file
--pop pop to before first guarded applied patch
--reapply
pop, then reapply patches
qseries
print the entire series file:
hg qseries [-ms]
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-m, --missing
print patches not in series
-s, --summary
print first line of patch header
qtop
print the name of the current patch:
hg qtop [-s]
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-s, --summary
print first line of patch header
qunapplied
print the patches not yet applied:
hg qunapplied [-1] [-s] [PATCH]
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-1, --first
show only the first patch
-s, --summary
print first line of patch header
File content management
qdiff
diff of the current patch and subsequent modifications:
hg qdiff [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Shows a diff which includes the current patch as well as any changes
which have been made in the working directory since the last refresh
(thus showing what the current patch would become after a qrefresh).
Use hg diff if you only want to see the changes made since the last
qrefresh, or hg export qtip if you want to see changes made by the cur-
rent patch without including changes made since the qrefresh.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-a, --text
treat all files as text
-g, --git
use git extended diff format (DEFAULT: diff.git)
--binary
generate binary diffs in git mode (default)
--nodates
omit dates from diff headers
--noprefix
omit a/ and b/ prefixes from filenames
-p, --show-function
show which function each change is in (DEFAULT: diff.showfunc)
--reverse
produce a diff that undoes the changes
-w, --ignore-all-space
ignore white space when comparing lines
-b, --ignore-space-change
ignore changes in the amount of white space
-B, --ignore-blank-lines
ignore changes whose lines are all blank
-Z, --ignore-space-at-eol
ignore changes in whitespace at EOL
-U,--unified <NUM>
number of lines of context to show
--stat output diffstat-style summary of changes
--root <DIR>
produce diffs relative to subdirectory
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
Change import/export
qimport
import a patch or existing changeset:
hg qimport [-e] [-n NAME] [-f] [-g] [-P] [-r REV]... [FILE]...
The patch is inserted into the series after the last applied patch. If
no patches have been applied, qimport prepends the patch to the series.
The patch will have the same name as its source file unless you give it
a new one with -n/--name.
You can register an existing patch inside the patch directory with the
-e/--existing flag.
With -f/--force, an existing patch of the same name will be overwrit-
ten.
An existing changeset may be placed under mq control with -r/--rev
(e.g. qimport --rev . -n patch will place the current revision under mq
control). With -g/--git, patches imported with --rev will use the git
diff format. See the diffs help topic for information on why this is
important for preserving rename/copy information and permission
changes. Use hg qfinish to remove changesets from mq control.
To import a patch from standard input, pass - as the patch file. When
importing from standard input, a patch name must be specified using the
--name flag.
To import an existing patch while renaming it:
hg qimport -e existing-patch -n new-name
Returns 0 if import succeeded.
Options:
-e, --existing
import file in patch directory
-n,--name <NAME>
name of patch file
-f, --force
overwrite existing files
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
place existing revisions under mq control
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
-P, --push
qpush after importing
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
narrow
create clones which fetch history data for subset of files (EXPERIMEN-
TAL)
Commands
Repository maintenance
tracked
show or change the current narrowspec:
hg tracked [OPTIONS]... [REMOTE]
With no argument, shows the current narrowspec entries, one per line.
Each line will be prefixed with 'I' or 'X' for included or excluded
patterns, respectively.
The narrowspec is comprised of expressions to match remote files and/or
directories that should be pulled into your client. The narrowspec has
include and exclude expressions, with excludes always trumping in-
cludes: that is, if a file matches an exclude expression, it will be
excluded even if it also matches an include expression. Excluding
files that were never included has no effect.
Each included or excluded entry is in the format described by 'hg help
patterns'.
The options allow you to add or remove included and excluded expres-
sions.
If --clear is specified, then all previous includes and excludes are
DROPPED and replaced by the new ones specified to --addinclude and
--addexclude. If --clear is specified without any further options, the
narrowspec will be empty and will not match any files.
If --auto-remove-includes is specified, then those includes that don't
match any files modified by currently visible local commits (those not
shared by the remote) will be added to the set of explicitly specified
includes to remove.
--import-rules accepts a path to a file containing rules, allowing you
to add --addinclude, --addexclude rules in bulk. Like the other include
and exclude switches, the changes are applied immediately.
Options:
--addinclude <VALUE[+]>
new paths to include
--removeinclude <VALUE[+]>
old paths to no longer include
--auto-remove-includes
automatically choose unused includes to remove
--addexclude <VALUE[+]>
new paths to exclude
--import-rules <VALUE>
import narrowspecs from a file
--removeexclude <VALUE[+]>
old paths to no longer exclude
--clear
whether to replace the existing narrowspec
--force-delete-local-changes
forces deletion of local changes when narrowing
--backup
back up local changes when narrowing (default: True)
--update-working-copy
update working copy when the store has changed
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
notify
hooks for sending email push notifications
This extension implements hooks to send email notifications when
changesets are sent from or received by the local repository.
First, enable the extension as explained in hg help extensions, and
register the hook you want to run. incoming and changegroup hooks are
run when changesets are received, while outgoing hooks are for change-
sets sent to another repository:
[hooks]
# one email for each incoming changeset
incoming.notify = python:hgext.notify.hook
# one email for all incoming changesets
changegroup.notify = python:hgext.notify.hook
# one email for all outgoing changesets
outgoing.notify = python:hgext.notify.hook
This registers the hooks. To enable notification, subscribers must be
assigned to repositories. The [usersubs] section maps multiple reposi-
tories to a given recipient. The [reposubs] section maps multiple re-
cipients to a single repository:
[usersubs]
# key is subscriber email, value is a comma-separated list of repo patterns
user@host = pattern
[reposubs]
# key is repo pattern, value is a comma-separated list of subscriber emails
pattern = user@host
A pattern is a glob matching the absolute path to a repository, option-
ally combined with a revset expression. A revset expression, if
present, is separated from the glob by a hash. Example:
[reposubs]
*/widgets#branch(release) = qa-team@example.com
This sends to qa-team@example.com whenever a changeset on the release
branch triggers a notification in any repository ending in widgets.
In order to place them under direct user management, [usersubs] and
[reposubs] sections may be placed in a separate hgrc file and incorpo-
rated by reference:
[notify]
config = /path/to/subscriptionsfile
Notifications will not be sent until the notify.test value is set to
False; see below.
Notifications content can be tweaked with the following configuration
entries:
notify.test
If True, print messages to stdout instead of sending them. De-
fault: True.
notify.sources
Space-separated list of change sources. Notifications are acti-
vated only when a changeset's source is in this list. Sources
may be:
serve
changesets received via http or ssh
pull
changesets received via hg pull
unbundle
changesets received via hg unbundle
push
changesets sent or received via hg push
bundle
changesets sent via hg unbundle
Default: serve.
notify.strip
Number of leading slashes to strip from url paths. By default,
notifications reference repositories with their absolute path.
notify.strip lets you turn them into relative paths. For exam-
ple, notify.strip=3 will change /long/path/repository into
repository. Default: 0.
notify.domain
Default email domain for sender or recipients with no explicit
domain. It is also used for the domain part of the Message-Id
when using notify.messageidseed.
notify.messageidseed
Create deterministic Message-Id headers for the mails based on
the seed and the revision identifier of the first commit in the
changeset.
notify.style
Style file to use when formatting emails.
notify.template
Template to use when formatting emails.
notify.incoming
Template to use when run as an incoming hook, overriding no-
tify.template.
notify.outgoing
Template to use when run as an outgoing hook, overriding no-
tify.template.
notify.changegroup
Template to use when running as a changegroup hook, overriding
notify.template.
notify.maxdiff
Maximum number of diff lines to include in notification email.
Set to 0 to disable the diff, or -1 to include all of it. De-
fault: 300.
notify.maxdiffstat
Maximum number of diffstat lines to include in notification
email. Set to -1 to include all of it. Default: -1.
notify.maxsubject
Maximum number of characters in email's subject line. Default:
67.
notify.diffstat
Set to True to include a diffstat before diff content. Default:
True.
notify.showfunc
If set, override diff.showfunc for the diff content. Default:
None.
notify.merge
If True, send notifications for merge changesets. Default: True.
notify.mbox
If set, append mails to this mbox file instead of sending. De-
fault: None.
notify.fromauthor
If set, use the committer of the first changeset in a change-
group for the "From" field of the notification mail. If not set,
take the user from the pushing repo. Default: False.
notify.reply-to-predecessor (EXPERIMENTAL)
If set and the changeset has a predecessor in the repository,
try to thread the notification mail with the predecessor. This
adds the "In-Reply-To" header to the notification mail with a
reference to the predecessor with the smallest revision number.
Mail threads can still be torn, especially when changesets are
folded.
This option must be used in combination with notify.messageid-
seed.
If set, the following entries will also be used to customize the noti-
fications:
email.from
Email From address to use if none can be found in the generated
email content.
web.baseurl
Root repository URL to combine with repository paths when making
references. See also notify.strip.
pager
browse command output with an external pager (DEPRECATED)
Forcibly enable paging for individual commands that don't typically re-
quest pagination with the attend-<command> option. This setting takes
precedence over ignore options and defaults:
[pager]
attend-cat = false
patchbomb
command to send changesets as (a series of) patch emails
The series is started off with a "[PATCH 0 of N]" introduction, which
describes the series as a whole.
Each patch email has a Subject line of "[PATCH M of N] ...", using the
first line of the changeset description as the subject text. The mes-
sage contains two or three body parts:
• The changeset description.
• [Optional] The result of running diffstat on the patch.
• The patch itself, as generated by hg export.
Each message refers to the first in the series using the In-Reply-To
and References headers, so they will show up as a sequence in threaded
mail and news readers, and in mail archives.
To configure other defaults, add a section like this to your configura-
tion file:
[email]
from = My Name <my@email>
to = recipient1, recipient2, ...
cc = cc1, cc2, ...
bcc = bcc1, bcc2, ...
reply-to = address1, address2, ...
Use [patchbomb] as configuration section name if you need to override
global [email] address settings.
Then you can use the hg email command to mail a series of changesets as
a patchbomb.
You can also either configure the method option in the email section to
be a sendmail compatible mailer or fill out the [smtp] section so that
the patchbomb extension can automatically send patchbombs directly from
the commandline. See the [email] and [smtp] sections in hgrc(5) for de-
tails.
By default, hg email will prompt for a To or CC header if you do not
supply one via configuration or the command line. You can override
this to never prompt by configuring an empty value:
[email]
cc =
You can control the default inclusion of an introduction message with
the patchbomb.intro configuration option. The configuration is always
overwritten by command line flags like --intro and --desc:
[patchbomb]
intro=auto # include introduction message if more than 1 patch (default)
intro=never # never include an introduction message
intro=always # always include an introduction message
You can specify a template for flags to be added in subject prefixes.
Flags specified by --flag option are exported as {flags} keyword:
[patchbomb]
flagtemplate = "{separate(' ',
ifeq(branch, 'default', '', branch|upper),
flags)}"
You can set patchbomb to always ask for confirmation by setting patch-
bomb.confirm to true.
Commands
Change import/export
email
send changesets by email:
hg email [OPTION]... [DEST]...
By default, diffs are sent in the format generated by hg export, one
per message. The series starts with a "[PATCH 0 of N]" introduction,
which describes the series as a whole.
Each patch email has a Subject line of "[PATCH M of N] ...", using the
first line of the changeset description as the subject text. The mes-
sage contains two or three parts. First, the changeset description.
With the -d/--diffstat option, if the diffstat program is installed,
the result of running diffstat on the patch is inserted.
Finally, the patch itself, as generated by hg export.
With the -d/--diffstat or --confirm options, you will be presented with
a final summary of all messages and asked for confirmation before the
messages are sent.
By default the patch is included as text in the email body for easy re-
viewing. Using the -a/--attach option will instead create an attachment
for the patch. With -i/--inline an inline attachment will be created.
You can include a patch both as text in the email body and as a regular
or an inline attachment by combining the -a/--attach or -i/--inline
with the --body option.
With -B/--bookmark changesets reachable by the given bookmark are se-
lected.
With -o/--outgoing, emails will be generated for patches not found in
the destination repository (or only those which are ancestors of the
specified revisions if any are provided)
With -b/--bundle, changesets are selected as for --outgoing, but a sin-
gle email containing a binary Mercurial bundle as an attachment will be
sent. Use the patchbomb.bundletype config option to control the bundle
type as with hg bundle --type.
With -m/--mbox, instead of previewing each patchbomb message in a pager
or sending the messages directly, it will create a UNIX mailbox file
with the patch emails. This mailbox file can be previewed with any mail
user agent which supports UNIX mbox files.
With -n/--test, all steps will run, but mail will not be sent. You
will be prompted for an email recipient address, a subject and an in-
troductory message describing the patches of your patchbomb. Then when
all is done, patchbomb messages are displayed.
In case email sending fails, you will find a backup of your series in-
troductory message in .hg/last-email.txt.
The default behavior of this command can be customized through configu-
ration. (See hg help patchbomb for details)
Examples:
hg email -r 3000 # send patch 3000 only
hg email -r 3000 -r 3001 # send patches 3000 and 3001
hg email -r 3000:3005 # send patches 3000 through 3005
hg email 3000 # send patch 3000 (deprecated)
hg email -o # send all patches not in default
hg email -o DEST # send all patches not in DEST
hg email -o -r 3000 # send all ancestors of 3000 not in default
hg email -o -r 3000 DEST # send all ancestors of 3000 not in DEST
hg email -B feature # send all ancestors of feature bookmark
hg email -b # send bundle of all patches not in default
hg email -b DEST # send bundle of all patches not in DEST
hg email -b -r 3000 # bundle of all ancestors of 3000 not in default
hg email -b -r 3000 DEST # bundle of all ancestors of 3000 not in DEST
hg email -o -m mbox && # generate an mbox file...
mutt -R -f mbox # ... and view it with mutt
hg email -o -m mbox && # generate an mbox file ...
formail -s sendmail \ # ... and use formail to send from the mbox
-bm -t < mbox # ... using sendmail
Before using this command, you will need to enable email in your hgrc.
See the [email] section in hgrc(5) for details.
Options:
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
--plain
omit hg patch header
-o, --outgoing
send changes not found in the target repository
-b, --bundle
send changes not in target as a binary bundle
-B,--bookmark <BOOKMARK>
send changes only reachable by given bookmark
--bundlename <NAME>
name of the bundle attachment file (default: bundle)
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
a revision to send
--force
run even when remote repository is unrelated (with -b/--bundle)
--base <REV[+]>
a base changeset to specify instead of a destination (with
-b/--bundle)
--intro
send an introduction email for a single patch
--body send patches as inline message text (default)
-a, --attach
send patches as attachments
-i, --inline
send patches as inline attachments
--bcc <EMAIL[+]>
email addresses of blind carbon copy recipients
-c,--cc <EMAIL[+]>
email addresses of copy recipients
--confirm
ask for confirmation before sending
-d, --diffstat
add diffstat output to messages
--date <DATE>
use the given date as the sending date
--desc <FILE>
use the given file as the series description
-f,--from <EMAIL>
email address of sender
-n, --test
print messages that would be sent
-m,--mbox <FILE>
write messages to mbox file instead of sending them
--reply-to <EMAIL[+]>
email addresses replies should be sent to
-s,--subject <TEXT>
subject of first message (intro or single patch)
--in-reply-to <MSGID>
message identifier to reply to
--flag <FLAG[+]>
flags to add in subject prefixes
-t,--to <EMAIL[+]>
email addresses of recipients
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
phabricator
simple Phabricator integration (EXPERIMENTAL)
This extension provides a phabsend command which sends a stack of
changesets to Phabricator, and a phabread command which prints a stack
of revisions in a format suitable for hg import, and a phabupdate com-
mand to update statuses in batch.
A "phabstatus" view for hg show is also provided; it displays status
information of Phabricator differentials associated with unfinished
changesets.
By default, Phabricator requires Test Plan which might prevent some
changeset from being sent. The requirement could be disabled by chang-
ing differential.require-test-plan-field config server side.
Config:
[phabricator]
# Phabricator URL
url = https://phab.example.com/
# Repo callsign. If a repo has a URL https://$HOST/diffusion/FOO, then its
# callsign is "FOO".
callsign = FOO
# curl command to use. If not set (default), use builtin HTTP library to
# communicate. If set, use the specified curl command. This could be useful
# if you need to specify advanced options that is not easily supported by
# the internal library.
curlcmd = curl --connect-timeout 2 --retry 3 --silent
# retry failed command N time (default 0). Useful when using the extension
# over flakly connection.
#
# We wait `retry.interval` between each retry, in seconds.
# (default 1 second).
retry = 3
retry.interval = 10
# the retry option can combine well with the http.timeout one.
#
# For example to give up on http request after 20 seconds:
[http]
timeout=20
[auth]
example.schemes = https
example.prefix = phab.example.com
# API token. Get it from https://$HOST/conduit/login/
example.phabtoken = cli-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Commands
Change import/export
phabimport
import patches from Phabricator for the specified Differential Revi-
sions:
hg phabimport DREVSPEC... [OPTIONS]
The patches are read and applied starting at the parent of the working
directory.
See hg help phabread for how to specify DREVSPEC.
Options:
--stack
import dependencies as well
--test-vcr <VALUE>
Path to a vcr file. If nonexistent, will record a new vcr tran-
script, otherwise will mock all http requests using the speci-
fied vcr file. (ADVANCED)
phabread
print patches from Phabricator suitable for importing:
hg phabread DREVSPEC... [OPTIONS]
DREVSPEC could be a Differential Revision identity, like D123, or just
the number 123. It could also have common operators like +, -, &, (, )
for complex queries. Prefix : could be used to select a stack. If mul-
tiple DREVSPEC values are given, the result is the union of each indi-
vidually evaluated value. No attempt is currently made to reorder the
values to run from parent to child.
abandoned, accepted, closed, needsreview, needsrevision could be used
to filter patches by status. For performance reason, they only repre-
sent a subset of non-status selections and cannot be used alone.
For example, :D6+8-(2+D4) selects a stack up to D6, plus D8 and exclude
D2 and D4. :D9 & needsreview selects "Needs Review" revisions in a
stack up to D9.
If --stack is given, follow dependencies information and read all
patches. It is equivalent to the : operator.
Options:
--stack
read dependencies
--test-vcr <VALUE>
Path to a vcr file. If nonexistent, will record a new vcr tran-
script, otherwise will mock all http requests using the speci-
fied vcr file. (ADVANCED)
phabsend
upload changesets to Phabricator:
hg phabsend REV [OPTIONS]
If there are multiple revisions specified, they will be send as a stack
with a linear dependencies relationship using the order specified by
the revset.
For the first time uploading changesets, local tags will be created to
maintain the association. After the first time, phabsend will check ob-
sstore and tags information so it can figure out whether to update an
existing Differential Revision, or create a new one.
If --amend is set, update commit messages so they have the Differential
Revision URL, remove related tags. This is similar to what arcanist
will do, and is more desired in author-push workflows. Otherwise, use
local tags to record the Differential Revision association.
The --confirm option lets you confirm changesets before sending them.
You can also add following to your configuration file to make it de-
fault behaviour:
[phabsend]
confirm = true
By default, a separate review will be created for each commit that is
selected, and will have the same parent/child relationship in Phabrica-
tor. If --fold is set, multiple commits are rolled up into a single
review as if diffed from the parent of the first revision to the last.
The commit messages are concatenated in the summary field on Phabrica-
tor.
phabsend will check obsstore and the above association to decide
whether to update an existing Differential Revision, or create a new
one.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
revisions to send
--amend
update commit messages (default: True)
--reviewer <VALUE[+]>
specify reviewers
--blocker <VALUE[+]>
specify blocking reviewers
-m,--comment <VALUE>
add a comment to Revisions with new/updated Diffs
--confirm
ask for confirmation before sending
--fold combine the revisions into one review
--test-vcr <VALUE>
Path to a vcr file. If nonexistent, will record a new vcr tran-
script, otherwise will mock all http requests using the speci-
fied vcr file. (ADVANCED)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
phabupdate
update Differential Revision in batch:
hg phabupdate [DREVSPEC...| -r REV...] [OPTIONS]
DREVSPEC selects revisions. See hg help phabread for its usage.
Options:
--accept
accept revisions
--reject
reject revisions
--request-review
request review on revisions
--abandon
abandon revisions
--reclaim
reclaim revisions
--close
close revisions
--reopen
reopen revisions
--plan-changes
plan changes for revisions
--resign
resign as a reviewer from revisions
--commandeer
commandeer revisions
-m,--comment <VALUE>
comment on the last revision
-r,--rev <REV>
local revision to update
--test-vcr <VALUE>
Path to a vcr file. If nonexistent, will record a new vcr tran-
script, otherwise will mock all http requests using the speci-
fied vcr file. (ADVANCED)
Uncategorized commands
purge
command to delete untracked files from the working directory (DEPRE-
CATED)
The functionality of this extension has been included in core Mercurial
since version 5.7. Please use hg purge ... instead. hg purge --confirm
is now the default, unless the extension is enabled for backward com-
patibility.
rebase
command to move sets of revisions to a different ancestor
This extension lets you rebase changesets in an existing Mercurial
repository.
For more information: https://mercurial-scm.org/wiki/RebaseExtension
Commands
Change manipulation
rebase
move changeset (and descendants) to a different branch:
hg rebase [[-s REV]... | [-b REV]... | [-r REV]...] [-d REV] [OPTION]...
Rebase uses repeated merging to graft changesets from one part of his-
tory (the source) onto another (the destination). This can be useful
for linearizing local changes relative to a master development tree.
Published commits cannot be rebased (see hg help phases). To copy com-
mits, see hg help graft.
If you don't specify a destination changeset (-d/--dest), rebase will
use the same logic as hg merge to pick a destination. if the current
branch contains exactly one other head, the other head is merged with
by default. Otherwise, an explicit revision with which to merge with
must be provided. (destination changeset is not modified by rebasing,
but new changesets are added as its descendants.)
Here are the ways to select changesets:
1. Explicitly select them using --rev.
2. Use --source to select a root changeset and include all of its
descendants.
3. Use --base to select a changeset; rebase will find ancestors and
their descendants which are not also ancestors of the destina-
tion.
4. If you do not specify any of --rev, --source, or --base, rebase
will use --base . as above.
If --source or --rev is used, special names SRC and ALLSRC can be used
in --dest. Destination would be calculated per source revision with SRC
substituted by that single source revision and ALLSRC substituted by
all source revisions.
Rebase will destroy original changesets unless you use --keep. It will
also move your bookmarks (even if you do).
Some changesets may be dropped if they do not contribute changes (e.g.
merges from the destination branch).
Unlike merge, rebase will do nothing if you are at the branch tip of a
named branch with two heads. You will need to explicitly specify source
and/or destination.
If you need to use a tool to automate merge/conflict decisions, you can
specify one with --tool, see hg help merge-tools. As a caveat: the
tool will not be used to mediate when a file was deleted, there is no
hook presently available for this.
If a rebase is interrupted to manually resolve a conflict, it can be
continued with --continue/-c, aborted with --abort/-a, or stopped with
--stop.
Examples:
• move "local changes" (current commit back to branching point) to the
current branch tip after a pull:
hg rebase
• move a single changeset to the stable branch:
hg rebase -r 5f493448 -d stable
• splice a commit and all its descendants onto another part of history:
hg rebase --source c0c3 --dest 4cf9
• rebase everything on a branch marked by a bookmark onto the default
branch:
hg rebase --base myfeature --dest default
• collapse a sequence of changes into a single commit:
hg rebase --collapse -r 1520:1525 -d .
• move a named branch while preserving its name:
hg rebase -r "branch(featureX)" -d 1.3 --keepbranches
• stabilize orphaned changesets so history looks linear:
hg rebase -r 'orphan()-obsolete()' -d 'first(max((successors(max(roots(ALLSRC) & ::SRC)^)-obsolete())::) + max(::((roots(ALLSRC) & ::SRC)^)-obsolete()))'
Configuration Options:
You can make rebase require a destination if you set the following con-
fig option:
[commands]
rebase.requiredest = True
By default, rebase will close the transaction after each commit. For
performance purposes, you can configure rebase to use a single transac-
tion across the entire rebase. WARNING: This setting introduces a sig-
nificant risk of losing the work you've done in a rebase if the rebase
aborts unexpectedly:
[rebase]
singletransaction = True
By default, rebase writes to the working copy, but you can configure it
to run in-memory for better performance. When the rebase is not moving
the parent(s) of the working copy (AKA the "currently checked out
changesets"), this may also allow it to run even if the working copy is
dirty:
[rebase]
experimental.inmemory = True
Return Values:
Returns 0 on success, 1 if nothing to rebase or there are unresolved
conflicts.
Options:
-s,--source <REV[+]>
rebase the specified changesets and their descendants
-b,--base <REV[+]>
rebase everything from branching point of specified changeset
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
rebase these revisions
-d,--dest <REV>
rebase onto the specified changeset
--collapse
collapse the rebased changesets
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as collapse commit message
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read collapse commit message from file
-k, --keep
keep original changesets
--keepbranches
keep original branch names
-D, --detach
(DEPRECATED)
-i, --interactive
(DEPRECATED)
-t,--tool <VALUE>
specify merge tool
--stop stop interrupted rebase
-c, --continue
continue an interrupted rebase
-a, --abort
abort an interrupted rebase
--auto-orphans <VALUE>
automatically rebase orphan revisions in the specified revset
(EXPERIMENTAL)
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
--confirm
ask before applying actions
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
record
commands to interactively select changes for commit/qrefresh (DEPRE-
CATED)
The feature provided by this extension has been moved into core Mercu-
rial as hg commit --interactive.
Commands
Change creation
qrecord
interactively record a new patch:
hg qrecord [OPTION]... PATCH [FILE]...
See hg help qnew & hg help record for more information and usage.
record
interactively select changes to commit:
hg record [OPTION]... [FILE]...
If a list of files is omitted, all changes reported by hg status will
be candidates for recording.
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
If using the text interface (see hg help config), you will be prompted
for whether to record changes to each modified file, and for files with
multiple changes, for each change to use. For each query, the following
responses are possible:
y - record this change
n - skip this change
e - edit this change manually
s - skip remaining changes to this file
f - record remaining changes to this file
d - done, skip remaining changes and files
a - record all changes to all remaining files
q - quit, recording no changes
? - display help
This command is not available when committing a merge.
Options:
-A, --addremove
mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing
--close-branch
mark a branch head as closed
--amend
amend the parent of the working directory
-s, --secret
use the secret phase for committing
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
--force-close-branch
forcibly close branch from a non-head changeset (ADVANCED)
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
-w, --ignore-all-space
ignore white space when comparing lines
-b, --ignore-space-change
ignore changes in the amount of white space
-B, --ignore-blank-lines
ignore changes whose lines are all blank
-Z, --ignore-space-at-eol
ignore changes in whitespace at EOL
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
releasenotes
generate release notes from commit messages (EXPERIMENTAL)
It is common to maintain files detailing changes in a project between
releases. Maintaining these files can be difficult and time consuming.
The hg releasenotes command provided by this extension makes the
process simpler by automating it.
Commands
Change navigation
releasenotes
parse release notes from commit messages into an output file:
hg releasenotes [-r REV] [-c] FILE
Given an output file and set of revisions, this command will parse com-
mit messages for release notes then add them to the output file.
Release notes are defined in commit messages as ReStructuredText direc-
tives. These have the form:
.. directive:: title
content
Each directive maps to an output section in a generated release notes
file, which itself is ReStructuredText. For example, the .. feature::
directive would map to a New Features section.
Release note directives can be either short-form or long-form. In
short- form, title is omitted and the release note is rendered as a
bullet list. In long form, a sub-section with the title title is added
to the section.
The FILE argument controls the output file to write gathered release
notes to. The format of the file is:
Section 1
=========
...
Section 2
=========
...
Only sections with defined release notes are emitted.
If a section only has short-form notes, it will consist of bullet list:
Section
=======
* Release note 1
* Release note 2
If a section has long-form notes, sub-sections will be emitted:
Section
=======
Note 1 Title
------------
Description of the first long-form note.
Note 2 Title
------------
Description of the second long-form note.
If the FILE argument points to an existing file, that file will be
parsed for release notes having the format that would be generated by
this command. The notes from the processed commit messages will be
merged into this parsed set.
During release notes merging:
• Duplicate items are automatically ignored
• Items that are different are automatically ignored if the similarity
is greater than a threshold.
This means that the release notes file can be updated independently
from this command and changes should not be lost when running this com-
mand on that file. A particular use case for this is to tweak the word-
ing of a release note after it has been added to the release notes
file.
The -c/--check option checks the commit message for invalid admoni-
tions.
The -l/--list option, presents the user with a list of existing avail-
able admonitions along with their title. This also includes the custom
admonitions (if any).
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
revisions to process for release notes
-c, --check
checks for validity of admonitions (if any)
-l, --list
list the available admonitions with their title
Uncategorized commands
relink
recreates hardlinks between repository clones
Commands
Repository maintenance
relink
recreate hardlinks between two repositories:
hg relink [ORIGIN]
When repositories are cloned locally, their data files will be
hardlinked so that they only use the space of a single repository.
Unfortunately, subsequent pulls into either repository will break
hardlinks for any files touched by the new changesets, even if both
repositories end up pulling the same changes.
Similarly, passing --rev to "hg clone" will fail to use any hardlinks,
falling back to a complete copy of the source repository.
This command lets you recreate those hardlinks and reclaim that wasted
space.
This repository will be relinked to share space with ORIGIN, which must
be on the same local disk. If ORIGIN is omitted, looks for "default-re-
link", then "default", in [paths].
Do not attempt any read operations on this repository while the command
is running. (Both repositories will be locked against writes.)
remotefilelog
remotefilelog causes Mercurial to lazilly fetch file contents (EXPERI-
MENTAL)
This extension is HIGHLY EXPERIMENTAL. There are NO BACKWARDS COMPATI-
BILITY GUARANTEES. This means that repositories created with this ex-
tension may only be usable with the exact version of this exten-
sion/Mercurial that was used. The extension attempts to enforce this in
order to prevent repository corruption.
remotefilelog works by fetching file contents lazily and storing them
in a cache on the client rather than in revlogs. This allows enormous
histories to be transferred only partially, making them easier to oper-
ate on.
Configs:
packs.maxchainlen specifies the maximum delta chain length in pack
files
packs.maxpacksize specifies the maximum pack file size
packs.maxpackfilecount specifies the maximum number of packs in the
shared cache (trees only for now)
remotefilelog.backgroundprefetch runs prefetch in background when
True
remotefilelog.bgprefetchrevs specifies revisions to fetch on commit
and
update, and on other commands that use them. Different from
pullprefetch.
remotefilelog.gcrepack does garbage collection during repack when
True
remotefilelog.nodettl specifies maximum TTL of a node in seconds be-
fore
it is garbage collected
remotefilelog.repackonhggc runs repack on hg gc when True
remotefilelog.prefetchdays specifies the maximum age of a commit in
days after which it is no longer prefetched.
remotefilelog.prefetchdelay specifies delay between background
prefetches in seconds after operations that change the work-
ing copy parent
remotefilelog.data.gencountlimit constraints the minimum number of
data
pack files required to be considered part of a generation. In
particular, minimum number of packs files > gencountlimit.
remotefilelog.data.generations list for specifying the lower bound
of
each generation of the data pack files. For example, list
['100MB','1MB'] or ['1MB', '100MB'] will lead to three gener-
ations: [0, 1MB), [ 1MB, 100MB) and [100MB, infinity).
remotefilelog.data.maxrepackpacks the maximum number of pack files
to
include in an incremental data repack.
remotefilelog.data.repackmaxpacksize the maximum size of a pack file
for
it to be considered for an incremental data repack.
remotefilelog.data.repacksizelimit the maximum total size of pack
files
to include in an incremental data repack.
remotefilelog.history.gencountlimit constraints the minimum number
of
history pack files required to be considered part of a gener-
ation. In particular, minimum number of packs files > gen-
countlimit.
remotefilelog.history.generations list for specifying the lower
bound of
each generation of the history pack files. For example, list
[ '100MB', '1MB'] or ['1MB', '100MB'] will lead to three gen-
erations: [ 0, 1MB), [1MB, 100MB) and [100MB, infinity).
remotefilelog.history.maxrepackpacks the maximum number of pack
files to
include in an incremental history repack.
remotefilelog.history.repackmaxpacksize the maximum size of a pack
file
for it to be considered for an incremental history repack.
remotefilelog.history.repacksizelimit the maximum total size of pack
files to include in an incremental history repack.
remotefilelog.backgroundrepack automatically consolidate packs in
the
background
remotefilelog.cachepath path to cache
remotefilelog.cachegroup if set, make cache directory sgid to this
group
remotefilelog.cacheprocess binary to invoke for fetching file data
remotefilelog.debug turn on remotefilelog-specific debug output
remotefilelog.excludepattern pattern of files to exclude from pulls
remotefilelog.includepattern pattern of files to include in pulls
remotefilelog.fetchwarning: message to print when too many
single-file fetches occur
remotefilelog.getfilesstep number of files to request in a single
RPC
remotefilelog.getfilestype if set to 'threaded' use threads to fetch
files, otherwise use optimistic fetching
remotefilelog.pullprefetch revset for selecting files that should be
eagerly downloaded rather than lazily
remotefilelog.reponame name of the repo. If set, used to partition
data from other repos in a shared store.
remotefilelog.server if true, enable server-side functionality
remotefilelog.servercachepath path for caching blobs on the server
remotefilelog.serverexpiration number of days to keep cached server
blobs
remotefilelog.validatecache if set, check cache entries for corrup-
tion
before returning blobs
remotefilelog.validatecachelog if set, check cache entries for
corruption before returning metadata
Commands
Repository maintenance
prefetch
prefetch file revisions from the server:
hg prefetch [OPTIONS] [FILE...]
Prefetchs file revisions for the specified revs and stores them in the
local remotefilelog cache. If no rev is specified, the default rev is
used which is the union of dot, draft, pullprefetch and bgprefetchrev.
File names or patterns can be used to limit which files are downloaded.
Return 0 on success.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
prefetch the specified revisions
--repack
run repack after prefetch
-b,--base <VALUE>
rev that is assumed to already be local
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
Uncategorized commands
gc
garbage collect the client and server filelog caches:
hg gc [REPO...]
garbage collect the client and server filelog caches
repack
hg repack [OPTIONS]
Options:
--background
run in a background process
--incremental
do an incremental repack
--packsonly
only repack packs (skip loose objects)
verifyremotefilelog
hg verifyremotefilelogs <directory>
Options:
-d, --decompress
decompress the filelogs first
remotenames
showing remotebookmarks and remotebranches in UI (EXPERIMENTAL)
By default both remotebookmarks and remotebranches are turned on. Con-
fig knob to control the individually are as follows.
Config options to tweak the default behaviour:
remotenames.bookmarks
Boolean value to enable or disable showing of remotebookmarks
(default: True)
remotenames.branches
Boolean value to enable or disable showing of remotebranches
(default: True)
remotenames.hoistedpeer
Name of the peer whose remotebookmarks should be hoisted into
the top-level namespace (default: 'default')
schemes
extend schemes with shortcuts to repository swarms
This extension allows you to specify shortcuts for parent URLs with a
lot of repositories to act like a scheme, for example:
[schemes]
py = http://code.python.org/hg/
After that you can use it like:
hg clone py://trunk/
Additionally there is support for some more complex schemas, for exam-
ple used by Google Code:
[schemes]
gcode = http://{1}.googlecode.com/hg/
The syntax is taken from Mercurial templates, and you have unlimited
number of variables, starting with {1} and continuing with {2}, {3} and
so on. This variables will receive parts of URL supplied, split by /.
Anything not specified as {part} will be just appended to an URL.
For convenience, the extension adds these schemes by default:
[schemes]
py = http://hg.python.org/
bb = https://bitbucket.org/
bb+ssh = ssh://hg@bitbucket.org/
gcode = https://{1}.googlecode.com/hg/
kiln = https://{1}.kilnhg.com/Repo/
You can override a predefined scheme by defining a new scheme with the
same name.
Commands
Uncategorized commands
share
share a common history between several working directories
The share extension introduces a new command hg share to create a new
working directory. This is similar to hg clone, but doesn't involve
copying or linking the storage of the repository. This allows working
on different branches or changes in parallel without the associated
cost in terms of disk space.
Note: destructive operations or extensions like hg rollback should be
used with care as they can result in confusing problems.
Automatic Pooled Storage for Clones
When this extension is active, hg clone can be configured to automati-
cally share/pool storage across multiple clones. This mode effectively
converts hg clone to hg clone + hg share. The benefit of using this
mode is the automatic management of store paths and intelligent pooling
of related repositories.
The following share. config options influence this feature:
share.pool
Filesystem path where shared repository data will be stored.
When defined, hg clone will automatically use shared repository
storage instead of creating a store inside each clone.
share.poolnaming
How directory names in share.pool are constructed.
"identity" means the name is derived from the first changeset in
the repository. In this mode, different remotes share storage if
their root/initial changeset is identical. In this mode, the lo-
cal shared repository is an aggregate of all encountered remote
repositories.
"remote" means the name is derived from the source repository's
path or URL. In this mode, storage is only shared if the path or
URL requested in the hg clone command matches exactly to a
repository that was cloned before.
The default naming mode is "identity".
Sharing requirements and configs of source repository with shares:
By default creating a shared repository only enables sharing a common
history and does not share requirements and configs between them. This
may lead to problems in some cases, for example when you upgrade the
storage format from one repository but does not set related configs in
the shares.
Setting format.exp-share-safe = True enables sharing configs and re-
quirements. This only applies to shares which are done after enabling
the config option.
For enabling this in existing shares, enable the config option and re-
share.
For resharing existing shares, make sure your working directory is
clean and there are no untracked files, delete that share and create a
new share.
Commands
Repository creation
share
create a new shared repository:
hg share [-U] [-B] SOURCE [DEST]
Initialize a new repository and working directory that shares its his-
tory (and optionally bookmarks) with another repository.
Note using rollback or extensions that destroy/modify history (mq,
rebase, etc.) can cause considerable confusion with shared
clones. In particular, if two shared clones are both updated to
the same changeset, and one of them destroys that changeset with
rollback, the other clone will suddenly stop working: all opera-
tions will fail with "abort: working directory has unknown par-
ent". The only known workaround is to use debugsetparents on the
broken clone to reset it to a changeset that still exists.
Options:
-U, --noupdate
do not create a working directory
-B, --bookmarks
also share bookmarks
--relative
point to source using a relative path
Repository maintenance
unshare
convert a shared repository to a normal one:
hg unshare
Copy the store data to the repo and remove the sharedpath data.
show
unified command to show various repository information (EXPERIMENTAL)
This extension provides the hg show command, which provides a central
command for displaying commonly-accessed repository data and views of
that data.
The following config options can influence operation.
commands
show.aliasprefix
List of strings that will register aliases for views. e.g. s
will effectively set config options alias.s<view> = show <view>
for all views. i.e. hg swork would execute hg show work.
Aliases that would conflict with existing registrations will not
be performed.
Commands
Change navigation
show
show various repository information:
hg show VIEW
A requested view of repository data is displayed.
If no view is requested, the list of available views is shown and the
command aborts.
Note There are no backwards compatibility guarantees for the output
of this command. Output may change in any future Mercurial re-
lease.
Consumers wanting stable command output should specify a tem-
plate via -T/--template.
List of available views:
bookmarks bookmarks and their associated changeset
stack current line of work
work changesets that aren't finished
Options:
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
sparse
allow sparse checkouts of the working directory (EXPERIMENTAL)
(This extension is not yet protected by backwards compatibility guaran-
tees. Any aspect may break in future releases until this notice is re-
moved.)
This extension allows the working directory to only consist of a subset
of files for the revision. This allows specific files or directories to
be explicitly included or excluded. Many repository operations have
performance proportional to the number of files in the working direc-
tory. So only realizing a subset of files in the working directory can
improve performance.
Sparse Config Files
The set of files that are part of a sparse checkout are defined by a
sparse config file. The file defines 3 things: includes (files to in-
clude in the sparse checkout), excludes (files to exclude from the
sparse checkout), and profiles (links to other config files).
The file format is newline delimited. Empty lines and lines beginning
with # are ignored.
Lines beginning with %include `` denote another sparse config file to
include. e.g. ``%include tests.sparse. The filename is relative to the
repository root.
The special lines [include] and [exclude] denote the section for in-
cludes and excludes that follow, respectively. It is illegal to have
[include] after [exclude].
Non-special lines resemble file patterns to be added to either includes
or excludes. The syntax of these lines is documented by hg help pat-
terns. Patterns are interpreted as glob: by default and match against
the root of the repository.
Exclusion patterns take precedence over inclusion patterns. So even if
a file is explicitly included, an [exclude] entry can remove it.
For example, say you have a repository with 3 directories, frontend/,
backend/, and tools/. frontend/ and backend/ correspond to different
projects and it is uncommon for someone working on one to need the
files for the other. But tools/ contains files shared between both
projects. Your sparse config files may resemble:
# frontend.sparse
frontend/**
tools/**
# backend.sparse
backend/**
tools/**
Say the backend grows in size. Or there's a directory with thousands of
files you wish to exclude. You can modify the profile to exclude cer-
tain files:
[include]
backend/**
tools/**
[exclude]
tools/tests/**
Commands
Uncategorized commands
split
command to split a changeset into smaller ones (EXPERIMENTAL)
Commands
Change manipulation
split
split a changeset into smaller ones:
hg split [--no-rebase] [[-r] REV]
Repeatedly prompt changes and commit message for new changesets until
there is nothing left in the original changeset.
If --rev was not given, split the working directory parent.
By default, rebase connected non-obsoleted descendants onto the new
changeset. Use --no-rebase to avoid the rebase.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
revision to split
--rebase
rebase descendants after split (default: True)
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
sqlitestore
store repository data in SQLite (EXPERIMENTAL)
The sqlitestore extension enables the storage of repository data in
SQLite.
This extension is HIGHLY EXPERIMENTAL. There are NO BACKWARDS COMPATI-
BILITY GUARANTEES. This means that repositories created with this ex-
tension may only be usable with the exact version of this exten-
sion/Mercurial that was used. The extension attempts to enforce this in
order to prevent repository corruption.
In addition, several features are not yet supported or have known bugs:
• Only some data is stored in SQLite. Changeset, manifest, and other
repository data is not yet stored in SQLite.
• Transactions are not robust. If the process is aborted at the right
time during transaction close/rollback, the repository could be in an
inconsistent state. This problem will diminish once all repository
data is tracked by SQLite.
• Bundle repositories do not work (the ability to use e.g. hg -R <bun-
dle-file> log to automatically overlay a bundle on top of the exist-
ing repository).
• Various other features don't work.
This extension should work for basic clone/pull, update, and commit
workflows. Some history rewriting operations may fail due to lack of
support for bundle repositories.
To use, activate the extension and set the storage.new-repo-backend
config option to sqlite to enable new repositories to use SQLite for
storage.
strip
strip changesets and their descendants from history (DEPRECATED)
The functionality of this extension has been included in core Mercurial
since version 5.7. Please use hg debugstrip ... instead.
This extension allows you to strip changesets and all their descendants
from the repository. See the command help for details.
transplant
command to transplant changesets from another branch
This extension allows you to transplant changes to another parent revi-
sion, possibly in another repository. The transplant is done using
'diff' patches.
Transplanted patches are recorded in .hg/transplant/transplants, as a
map from a changeset hash to its hash in the source repository.
Commands
Change manipulation
transplant
transplant changesets from another branch:
hg transplant [-s REPO] [-b BRANCH [-a]] [-p REV] [-m REV] [REV]...
Selected changesets will be applied on top of the current working di-
rectory with the log of the original changeset. The changesets are
copied and will thus appear twice in the history with different identi-
ties.
Consider using the graft command if everything is inside the same
repository - it will use merges and will usually give a better result.
Use the rebase extension if the changesets are unpublished and you want
to move them instead of copying them.
If --log is specified, log messages will have a comment appended of the
form:
(transplanted from CHANGESETHASH)
You can rewrite the changelog message with the --filter option. Its
argument will be invoked with the current changelog message as $1 and
the patch as $2.
--source/-s specifies another repository to use for selecting change-
sets, just as if it temporarily had been pulled. If --branch/-b is
specified, these revisions will be used as heads when deciding which
changesets to transplant, just as if only these revisions had been
pulled. If --all/-a is specified, all the revisions up to the heads
specified with --branch will be transplanted.
Example:
• transplant all changes up to REV on top of your current revision:
hg transplant --branch REV --all
You can optionally mark selected transplanted changesets as merge
changesets. You will not be prompted to transplant any ancestors of a
merged transplant, and you can merge descendants of them normally in-
stead of transplanting them.
Merge changesets may be transplanted directly by specifying the proper
parent changeset by calling hg transplant --parent.
If no merges or revisions are provided, hg transplant will start an in-
teractive changeset browser.
If a changeset application fails, you can fix the merge by hand and
then resume where you left off by calling hg transplant --continue/-c.
Options:
-s,--source <REPO>
transplant changesets from REPO
-b,--branch <REV[+]>
use this source changeset as head
-a, --all
pull all changesets up to the --branch revisions
-p,--prune <REV[+]>
skip over REV
-m,--merge <REV[+]>
merge at REV
--parent <REV>
parent to choose when transplanting merge
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
--log append transplant info to log message
--stop stop interrupted transplant
-c, --continue
continue last transplant session after fixing conflicts
--filter <CMD>
filter changesets through command
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
uncommit
uncommit part or all of a local changeset (EXPERIMENTAL)
This command undoes the effect of a local commit, returning the af-
fected files to their uncommitted state. This means that files modi-
fied, added or removed in the changeset will be left unchanged, and so
will remain modified, added and removed in the working directory.
Commands
Change manipulation
unamend
undo the most recent amend operation on a current changeset:
hg unamend
This command will roll back to the previous version of a changeset,
leaving working directory in state in which it was before running hg
amend (e.g. files modified as part of an amend will be marked as modi-
fied hg status)
uncommit
uncommit part or all of a local changeset:
hg uncommit [OPTION]... [FILE]...
This command undoes the effect of a local commit, returning the af-
fected files to their uncommitted state. This means that files modified
or deleted in the changeset will be left unchanged, and so will remain
modified in the working directory.
If no files are specified, the commit will be pruned, unless --keep is
given.
Options:
--keep allow an empty commit after uncommitting
--allow-dirty-working-copy
allow uncommit with outstanding changes
-n,--note <TEXT>
store a note on uncommit
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
-D, --currentdate
record the current date as commit date
-U, --currentuser
record the current user as committer
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
win32mbcs
allow the use of MBCS paths with problematic encodings
Some MBCS encodings are not good for some path operations (i.e. split-
ting path, case conversion, etc.) with its encoded bytes. We call such
a encoding (i.e. shift_jis and big5) as "problematic encoding". This
extension can be used to fix the issue with those encodings by wrapping
some functions to convert to Unicode string before path operation.
This extension is useful for:
• Japanese Windows users using shift_jis encoding.
• Chinese Windows users using big5 encoding.
• All users who use a repository with one of problematic encodings on
case-insensitive file system.
This extension is not needed for:
• Any user who use only ASCII chars in path.
• Any user who do not use any of problematic encodings.
Note that there are some limitations on using this extension:
• You should use single encoding in one repository.
• If the repository path ends with 0x5c, .hg/hgrc cannot be read.
• win32mbcs is not compatible with fixutf8 extension.
By default, win32mbcs uses encoding.encoding decided by Mercurial. You
can specify the encoding by config option:
[win32mbcs]
encoding = sjis
It is useful for the users who want to commit with UTF-8 log message.
win32text
perform automatic newline conversion (DEPRECATED)
Deprecation: The win32text extension requires each user to configure
the extension again and again for each clone since the configuration
is not copied when cloning.
We have therefore made the eol as an alternative. The eol uses a
version controlled file for its configuration and each clone will
therefore use the right settings from the start.
To perform automatic newline conversion, use:
[extensions]
win32text =
[encode]
** = cleverencode:
# or ** = macencode:
[decode]
** = cleverdecode:
# or ** = macdecode:
If not doing conversion, to make sure you do not commit CRLF/CR by ac-
cident:
[hooks]
pretxncommit.crlf = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcrlf
# or pretxncommit.cr = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcr
To do the same check on a server to prevent CRLF/CR from being pushed
or pulled:
[hooks]
pretxnchangegroup.crlf = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcrlf
# or pretxnchangegroup.cr = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcr
zeroconf
discover and advertise repositories on the local network
The zeroconf extension will advertise hg serve instances over DNS-SD so
that they can be discovered using the hg paths command without knowing
the server's IP address.
To allow other people to discover your repository using run hg serve in
your repository:
$ cd test
$ hg serve
You can discover Zeroconf-enabled repositories by running hg paths:
$ hg paths
zc-test = http://example.com:8000/test
FILES
/etc/mercurial/hgrc, $HOME/.hgrc, .hg/hgrc
This file contains defaults and configuration. Values in
.hg/hgrc override those in $HOME/.hgrc, and these override set-
tings made in the global /etc/mercurial/hgrc configuration. See
hgrc(5) for details of the contents and format of these files.
.hgignore
This file contains regular expressions (one per line) that de-
scribe file names that should be ignored by hg. For details, see
hgignore(5).
.hgsub
This file defines the locations of all subrepositories, and
tells where the subrepository checkouts came from. For details,
see hg help subrepos.
.hgsubstate
This file is where Mercurial stores all nested repository
states. NB: This file should not be edited manually.
.hgtags
This file contains changeset hash values and text tag names (one
of each separated by spaces) that correspond to tagged versions
of the repository contents. The file content is encoded using
UTF-8.
.hg/last-message.txt
This file is used by hg commit to store a backup of the commit
message in case the commit fails.
.hg/localtags
This file can be used to define local tags which are not shared
among repositories. The file format is the same as for .hgtags,
but it is encoded using the local system encoding.
Some commands (e.g. revert) produce backup files ending in .orig, if
the .orig file already exists and is not tracked by Mercurial, it will
be overwritten.
BUGS
Probably lots, please post them to the mailing list (see Resources
below) when you find them.
SEE ALSO
hgignore(5), hgrc(5)
AUTHOR
Written by Olivia Mackall <olivia@selenic.com>
RESOURCES
Main Web Site: https://mercurial-scm.org/
Source code repository: https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg
Mailing list: https://www.mercurial-scm.org/mailman/listinfo/mercurial/
COPYING
Copyright (C) 2005-2023 Olivia Mackall. Free use of this software is
granted under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 or
any later version.
AUTHOR
Olivia Mackall <olivia@selenic.com>
Organization: Mercurial
HG(1)
Generated by dwww version 1.15 on Sun Jun 23 05:41:48 CEST 2024.